Download Series MG369xB Synthesized Signal Generators Operation Manual

SERIES
MG369XB
SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATORS
OPERATION MANUAL
490 JARVIS DRIVE
MORGAN HILL, CA 95037-2809
P/N: 10370-10365
REVISION: D
PRINTED: MARCH 2007
COPYRIGHT 2007 ANRITSU CO.
WARRANTY
The Anritsu product(s) listed on the title page is (are) warranted against defects in materials and
workmanship for three years from the date of shipment.
Anritsu's obligation covers repairing or replacing products which prove to be defective during the
warranty period. Buyers shall prepay transportation charges for equipment returned to Anritsu for
warranty repairs. Obligation is limited to the original purchaser. Anritsu is not liable for consequential damages.
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty does not apply to Anritsu connectors that have failed due to normal wear.
Also, the warranty does not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by
the Buyer, unauthorized modification or misuse, or operation outside of the environmental specifications of the product. No other warranty is expressed or implied, and the remedies provided herein
are the Buyer's sole and exclusive remedies.
TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Adobe Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NOTICE
Anritsu Company has prepared this manual for use by Anritsu Company personnel and customers
as a guide for the proper installation, operation, and maintenance of Anritsu Company equipment
and computer programs. The drawings, specifications, and information contained herein are the
property of Anritsu Company, and any unauthorized use or disclosure of these drawings, specifications, and information is prohibited; they shall not be reproduced, copied, or used in whole or in part
as the basis for manufacture or sale of the equipment or software programs without the prior written consent of Anritsu Company.
UPDATES
Updates to this manual, if any, may be downloaded from the Anritsu Internet site at:
http://www.us.anritsu.com
Safety Symbols
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, Anritsu Company uses the
following symbols to indicate safety-related information. For your own safety, please read the information
carefully BEFORE operating the equipment.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that
could result in personal injury or loss of life if not performed properly.
Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which,
if not performed properly, could result in damage to or destruction of a
component of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION note
until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
The instrument is marked with this symbol to indicate that it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the operation manual.
Indicates ground.
MG369XB OM
Safety-1
For Safety
WARNING
When supplying power to this equipment, always use a
three-wire power cable connected to a three-wire power line
outlet. If power is supplied without grounding the equipment in this manner, there is a risk of receiving a severe or
fatal electric shock.
WARNING
Before changing the fuse, always remove the power cord
from the power outlet. There is the risk of receiving a fatal
electric shock if the fuse is replaced with the power cord
connected.
Always use a new fuse of the type and rating specified by
the fuse markings on the rear panel of the instrument.
WARNING
There are no operator serviceable components inside. Refer
servicing of the instrument to qualified service technicians.
To prevent the risk of electrical shock or damage to precision components, do not remove the equipment covers.
WARNING
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the
manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment
may be impaired.
Safety-2
MG369XB OM
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 General Information
1-1
Scope of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-4
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-5
Electronic Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-6
Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
GPIB Programming Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Maintenance Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-7
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-8
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-9
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Chapter 2 Installation
2-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3
Preparation For Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-4
Rack Mounting Kit Installation .
Preliminary . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . .
Power Requirements . . . .
Power Connection . . . . .
Standby Operation . . . . .
Warmup Time . . . . . . .
Operating Environment . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-5
GPIB Setup and Interconnection. .
Interface Connector . . . . . .
Cable Length Restrictions . . .
GPIB Interconnection . . . . .
Setting the GPIB Address . . .
Selecting the Line Terminator .
Interface Language . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
MG369XB OM
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-12
i
Table of Contents (Continued)
2-6
Preparation for Storage/Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Preparation for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-7
Anritsu Service Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Chapter 3 Local (Front Panel) Operation
ii
3-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-2
Front Panel Layout. . . . . . . .
Line Key . . . . . . . . . .
Data Display Area . . . . .
Data Entry Area . . . . . .
RF Output Control Key . . .
RF Output Connector. . . .
3-3
Data Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Menu Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Menu Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-4
Data Entry Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-5
Instrument Start-Up . . . . . . . . .
Powering Up the MG369XB . . .
Start-Up Display . . . . . . . .
Standby Operation . . . . . . .
Self-Testing the MG369XB . . .
Resetting to Default Parameters .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-6
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Parameter . .
Editing the Current Value .
Entering a New Value . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-17
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-7
CW Frequency Operation. . . . .
Selecting CW Mode . . . . .
Selecting a CW Frequency . .
Selecting a Power Level . . .
CW Ramp . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Offset . . . . . . . .
Electronic Frequency Control
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
MG369XB OM
Table of Contents (Continued)
3-8
Sweep Frequency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Analog Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . .
Setting Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Step Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Step Size, Dwell Time, and Sweep Time
Selecting a Sweep Trigger . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Manual Sweep Mode. . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Alternate Sweep Mode . . . . . . . .
List Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting List Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . .
List Frequency Editing . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Power Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a List Sweep Range . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a List Sweep Trigger . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-26
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-36
3-36
3-38
3-42
3-43
3-45
3-46
3-48
3-49
3-9
Fixed Power Level Operation. . . . . .
Selecting Fixed Power Level Mode .
Selecting a Power Level . . . . . .
Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-51
3-51
3-51
3-54
3-10 Power Level Sweep Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting CW Power Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting CW Power Sweep Step Size and Dwell Time . . .
Selecting a CW Power Sweep Trigger . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Power Level Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode . . . . .
Setting Power Level Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-56
3-56
3-57
3-57
3-59
3-61
3-62
3-11 Leveling Operations . . . . . .
Selecting a Leveling Mode .
Attenuator Decoupling . .
ALC Power Slope . . . . .
User Cal (User Power Level
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-63
3-63
3-67
3-68
3-70
MG369XB OM
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
Flatness Calibration)
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
iii
Table of Contents (Continued)
3-12 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the System Configuration Menu .
Configuring the Front Panel . . . . . . .
Configuring the Rear Panel . . . . . . . .
Configuring the RF . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the GPIB . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Increment Sizes . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-76
3-76
3-77
3-78
3-79
3-81
3-84
3-13 Saving/Recalling Instrument Setups.
Saving Setups . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Setups . . . . . . . .
Erasing Stored Setups. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-85
3-85
3-86
3-86
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
3-14 Secure Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Memory Profile and Security Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3-15 Reference Loop Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Reference Oscillator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Reference Loop Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3-16 Signal Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Accessing Modulation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Amplitude Modulation Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Providing Amplitude Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Frequency Modulation Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Providing Frequency Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Phase Modulation Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
Providing Phase Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Pulse Modulation Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
Providing Pulse Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
3-17 Internal Power Meter (Option 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
3-18 Scan Modulation (Option 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
Chapter 4 Local Operation—Menu Maps
iv
4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2
Menu Map Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
MG369XB OM
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 5 Operation Verification
5-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-3
Test Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-4
Initial MG369XB Checkout . . .
Power Up . . . . . . . . .
Self-Test . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the MG369XB . .
Warmup Time . . . . . . .
5-5
Frequency Synthesis Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-6
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests. . . . . . . .
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Level Accuracy Test Procedure . . .
Power Level Flatness Test Procedure . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-12
Chapter 6 Operator Maintenance
6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2
Error and Warning/Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Self-Test Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Normal Operation Error and Warning/Status Messages . . . . 6-8
6-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-4
Routine Maintenance . . . . . .
Cleaning the Fan Filters. .
Cleaning the Data Display.
Replacing the Line Fuses .
MG369XB OM
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-14
v
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 7 Use With Other Instruments
7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2
Master-Slave Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Instruments . . . . .
Initiating Master-Slave Operation . .
Master-Slave Operation. . . . . . . .
Master-Slave Operation in VNA Mode
Terminating Master-Slave Operation .
7-3
Use with a 56100A Scalar Network Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Connecting the MG369XB to the 56100A . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-4
Use with a 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer . . .
Connecting the MG369XB to the 8003 . . .
Setting Up the MG369XB . . . . . . . . .
Initiating 8003 SNA Operation . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-5
Use with a HP8757D Scalar Network Analyzer.
Connecting the MG369XB to a HP8757D .
Setting Up the MG369XB . . . . . . . . .
Initiating HP8757D SNA Operation . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-15
7-15
7-16
7-18
7-6
IF Up-Conversion (Option 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
MG369XB Mixer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-7
mmWave Source Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-7
7-7
7-9
Appendix A Rear Panel Connectors
A-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A-2
Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A-3
Connector Pin-out Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Appendix B Performance Specifications
Subject Index
vi
MG369XB OM
Chapter 1
General Information
Table of Contents
1-1
Scope of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-4
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-5
Electronic Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-6
Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
GPIB Programming Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Maintenance Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-7
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-8
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-9
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1-1.
1-2
Series MG369XB Synthesized Signal Generator
MG369XB OM
Chapter 1
General Information
1-1
Scope of Manual
This manual provides general information, installation, and operating
information for the Anritsu series MG369XB synthesized signal generator. Throughout this manual, the terms MG369XB, signal generator,
and synthesizer will be used interchangeably to refer to the instrument. Manual organization is shown in the table of contents.
1-2
Introduction
This chapter contains general information about the series MG369XB
signal generators. It includes a general description of the instrument
and information on its identification number, related manuals, options,
and performance specifications. A listing of recommended test equipment is also provided.
1-3
Description
The series MG369XB synthesized signal generators are microprocessor-based, synthesized signal sources with high resolution phase-lock
capability. They generate both discrete CW frequencies and broad (full
range) and narrow band step sweeps across the frequency range of
2 GHz to 67 GHz. Options are available to extend the low end of the
frequency range to 0.1 Hz. All functions of the signal generator are
fully controllable locally from the front panel or remotely (except for
power on/standby) via the IEEE-488 General Purpose Interface Bus
(GPIB). Table 1-1, page 1-5, lists models, frequency ranges, and maximum leveled output.
1-4
Identification
Number
All Anritsu instruments are assigned a unique six-digit ID number,
such as “020312”. The ID number is imprinted on a decal that is affixed to the rear panel of the unit. Special-order instrument configurations also have an additional specials number tag attached to the rear
panel of the unit, such as SM1234.
When ordering parts or corresponding with Anritsu Customer Service,
please use the correct serial number with reference to the specific instrument's model number (for example, model MG3693B synthesized
signal generator, serial number: 020312).
MG369XB OM
1-3
Options
General Information
1-5
Electronic Manual
Updated manuals are available for download from the document area
of the Anritsu web site at: http://www.us.anritsu.com.
1-6
Related Manuals
This is one of a three manual set that consists of an operation manual,
a GPIB programming manual, and a maintenance manual.
1-7
1-4
Options
GPIB
Programming
Manual
The Series MG369XB Synthesized Signal Generator
GPIB Programming Manual provides information
for remote operation of the signal generator with
product specific commands sent from an external
controller via the IEEE 488 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). It contains a general description of
the GPIB and bus data transfer and control functions, a complete listing and description of all
MG369XB GPIB product specific commands, and
several programming examples. The Anritsu part
number for the GPIB programming manual is
10370-10366.
Maintenance
Manual
The Series MG369XB Synthesized Signal Generator
Maintenance Manual supplies service information
for all models in the MG369XB series. The service
information includes functional circuit descriptions,
block diagrams, performance verification tests, calibration procedures, troubleshooting data, and assembly and component removal/replacement
procedures. The Anritsu part number for the maintenance manual is 10370-10367.
The series MG369XB synthesizer provides a wide array of instrument
configurations through a series of base model and option choices.
Table 1-1, on page 1-5, lists the available models with frequency
ranges. Refer to Appendix B, MG3690B RF/Microwave Signal
Generators Technical Datasheet, P/N: 11410-00344, for current
information.
MG369XB OM
General Information
Table 1-1.
Options
Series MG369XB Model and Option List (1 of 2)
Model
Number
Configuration
Frequency
Range
MG3691B
With Option 4 or 5
Standard
³0.01 – £10.0 GHz
³2.0 – £10.0 GHz
MG3692B
With Option 4 or 5
Standard
³0.01 – £20.0 GHz
³2.0 – £20.0 GHz
MG3693B
With Option 4 or 5
Standard
³0.01 – £30.0 GHz
³2.0 – £30.0 GHz
MG3694B
With Option 4 or 5
Standard
³0.01 – £40.0 GHz
³2.0 – £40.0 GHz
MG3695B
With Option 4 or 5
Standard
³0.01 – £50.0 GHz
³2.0 – £50.0 GHz
MG3696B
With Option 4 or 5
Standard
³0.01 – £67.0 GHz*
³2.0 – £67.0 GHz*
*Operational to 70.0 GHz
Options List
Option 1A:
Rack Mounting with Slides—Rack mount kit containing a set of track slides (90° tilt capability), mounting
ears, and front panel handles for mounting the instrument in a standard 19-inch equipment rack.
Option 1B:
Rack Mounting without Slides—Modifies rack mounting hardware to install unit in a console that has
mounting shelves. Includes mounting ears and front panel handles.
Option 2X:
110 dB Mechanical Step Attenuator—Adds a 10 dB per step attenuator with a 110 dB range. Output power
is selected directly in dBm on the front panel (or via GPIB). Rated RF output power is reduced.
Option 2E:
120 dB Electronic Step Attenuator—Adds a 10 dB per step attenuator with a 120 dB range for models
having a high-end frequency of £20 GHz. Output power is selected directly in dBm on the front panel (or via
GPIB). Rated RF output power is reduced.
Option 3:
Ultra-Low Phase Noise—Adds new modules that significantly reduces single-sideband phase noise,
³2 GHz.
Option 4:
Digital Down Converter—Adds a digital down converter for ultra-low phase noise for 0.01 to 2.2 GHz RF
coverage.
Option 5:
Analog Down Converter—Adds an analog down converter for 0.01 to 2.0 GHz RF coverage.
Option 6:
Analog Sweep Capability—Adds analog sweep capability. (Limited to ³500 MHz when used with Option 4.)
Option 7:
IF Up-Conversion—Adds an internal 40 GHz mixer for up-converting an IF signal. Not available in
MG3695B, MG3696B, or with Option 18.
Option 8:
Power Monitor—Adds internal power measurement capability. (Not available with Option 9.)
Option 9X:
Rear Panel RF Output—Moves the RF output connector to the rear panel.
Option 10:
User-Defined Modulation Waveform Software—Adds a software package that provides the ability to serially (or via GPIB) download user-defined waveforms into the memory of the internal waveform generator.
Requires an external PC and an instrument with an internal low frequency generator (Option 23).
MG369XB OM
1-5
Options
Table 1-1.
General Information
Series MG369XB Model and Option List (2 of 2)
Option 12:
Option 13X*:
Option 14:
Option 15X:
External Frequency and Phase Modulation—Adds external FM/FM capabilities via a rear panel BNC connector. Requires an external modulating signal input or an internal low frequency generator (Option 23).
External Pulse Modulation—Adds external pulse modulation capability via a rear panel BNC connector.
Requires an external modulating signal input.
Amplitude Modulation—Adds external AM capability via a rear panel BNC connector. Requires an external
modulating signal input or an internal low frequency generator (Option 23).
High Power Output—Adds high-power RF components to the instrument providing increased RF output
power.
Option 16:
High-Stability Time Base—Adds an ovenized 10 MHz crystal oscillator with frequency stability of <5 x
10–10/day.
Option 17:
Delete Front Panel—Deletes the front panel for use in remote control applications where a front panel display or keyboard control are not needed.
Option 18:
mmW Bias Output—Adds a rear panel BNC Twinax connector to bias the 5400-xWRxx millimeter wave
source modules.
Option 20:
Scan Modulation—Adds an internal Scan modulator for simulating high-depth amplitude modulated signals.
Requires an external modulating signal input capability. (Not available on models MG3693B, MG3694B,
MG3695B, MG3696B, or with Options 2E, 7, 15X, or 22.)
Option 22:
0.1 Hz to 10.0 MHz Audio Frequency—Adds frequency coverage below 10 MHz. The frequency resolution
below 10 MHz is 0.02 Hz. Rated RF output power is reduced.
Option 23*:
Low Frequency Generator—Provides modulation waveforms for internal AM, FM, or FM. Not available
without Option 12 or 14.
Option 24*:
Internal Pulse Generator—Provides pulse waveforms for internal pulse modulation. Not available without
Option 13.
Option 25X*:
Analog Modulation Suite—The analog modulation suite bundles Options 12, 13, 14, 23 and 24, offering internal and external AM, FM, FM, and pulse modulation.
Option 26X*:
Pulse Modulation—Adds external pulse modulation via a rear panel BNC connector. For internal
modulation capability, requires additionally Pulse Generator, Option 27. (This option comes in different
versions based on instrument configuration.)
Option 27*:
LF Generator—Provides modulation waveforms for internal AM, FM, FM, and Pulse. (Not available without
Option 12, 14, or 26.)
Option 28X*:
Analog Modulation Suite—For ease of ordering and package pricing, this option bundles Options 12, 14,
26 and 27, offering internal and external AM, FM, FM, and Pulse Modulation. (This option comes in different
versions , based on instrument configuration.)
Option 30:
Low Phase Noise
* May not be availlable for all instruments or may require additional upgrades. Contact Anritsu customer service for details.
1-6
MG369XB OM
General Information
Recommended Test Equipment
1-8
Performance
Specifications
The series MG369XB synthesized signal generator performance specifications are provided in Appendix B.
1-9
Recommended Test
Equipment
Table 1-2 lists the recommended test equipment for performing the series MG369XB synthesized signal generator operation verification
tests in Chapter 5.
Table 1-2.
Instrument
Frequency
Counter
Recommended Test Equipment
Critical Specification
Recommended Manufacturer/Model
Range: 0.01 to 40 GHz
Input Z: 50W
Resolution: 1 Hz
Other: External Time Base
Input
Anritsu Model MF2414B
Range: 0.01 to 65 GHz
Input Z: 50W
Resolution: 1 Hz
Other: External Time Base
Input
EIP Microwave, Inc. Models 538B,
548B, or 578B,
with
Cable Kit: Option 590 and
External Mixer:
Option 91 (26.5 to 40 GHz)
Option 92 (40 to 60 GHz)
Option 93 (60 to 90 GHz)
or
Frequency
Counter
with
Cable Kit
and
External
Mixer
MG369XB OM
Power Meter, Range: –30 to +20 dBm
with
(1mW to 100 mW)
Power
Sensor
Anritsu Model ML2437A or ML2438A,
with
Power Sensor:
MA2474A (0.01 to 40 GHz)
MA2575A (0.01 to 50 GHz)
Oscilloscope
Tektronix, Inc. Model TAS485
Bandwidth: DC to 150 MHz
Vertical Sensitivity: 2 mV/
division
Horizontal Sensitivity: 50 ns/
division
1-7/1-8
Chapter 2
Installation
Table of Contents
2-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3
Preparation For Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-4
Rack Mounting Kit Installation .
Preliminary . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . .
Power Requirements . . . .
Power Connection . . . . .
Standby Operation . . . . .
Warmup Time . . . . . . .
Operating Environment . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-5
GPIB Setup and Interconnection. .
Interface Connector . . . . . .
Cable Length Restrictions . . .
GPIB Interconnection . . . . .
Setting the GPIB Address . . .
Selecting the Line Terminator .
Interface Language . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-6
Preparation for Storage/Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Preparation for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-7
Anritsu Service Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-12
Chapter 2
Installation
2-1
Introduction
This chapter provides installation instructions for the series
MG369XB synthesized signal generator. It includes information on initial inspection, preparation for use, storage, reshipment, and General
Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) setup and interconnections.
2-2
Initial Inspection
Inspect the shipping container for damage. If the shipping container or
cushioning material is damaged, retain until the contents of the shipment have been checked against the packing list and the signal generator has been checked for mechanical and electrical operation.
If the shipment is incomplete or if the signal generator is damaged
mechanically or electrically, notify your local sales representative or
Anritsu Customer Service. If either the shipping container is damaged
or the cushioning material shows signs of stress, notify the carrier as
well as Anritsu. Keep the shipping materials for the carrier's inspection.
2-3
Preparation For Use
MG369XB OM
Preparation for use consists of installing the instrument into a
suitable operating location and connecting the signal generator to a
power source. The following paragraphs provide these procedures
along with information about power requirements, warmup times, and
the operating environment. Figure 2-1, on the following page,
illustrates the basic outer dimensions of the instrument.
2-3
Preparation For Use
Figure 2-1.
2-4
Installation
MG369XB Outline Dimensions (in millimeters)
MG369XB OM
Installation
2-4
Rack Mounting Kit
Installation
Rack Mounting Kit Installation
The rack mounting kit (Option 1A) contains a set of track slides (90°
tilt capability), mounting ears, and front panel handles for mounting
the signal generator in a standard equipment rack. The following procedure provides instructions for installing the rack mounting hardware on to the instrument. The rack mounting kit (Option 1B) uses
the same inner assembly without the slide. This procedure may also be
used for installing the Option 1B rack mount assembly. Refer to Figures 2-3 and 2-4 during this procedure.
Preliminary
Disconnect the power cord and any other cables
from the instrument.
Procedure
Install the rack mounting hardware as follows:
Step 1.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the
screws and the front handle assemblies
from the instrument. (For instruments
not having front handles, remove the
screws and the front top and bottom feet
from the instrument.) Retain the screws.
Step 2.
Remove the four feet from the rear of the
instrument. Retain the screws.
Rear Feet
(4)
Figure 2-3.
MG369XB OM
Front Handle and Feet Removal
2-5
Rack Mounting Kit Installation
NOTE
The screws with green heads have
metric threads. When it becomes
necessary to replace any of these
screws, always use the exact replacement green-headed screws to
avoid damage to the instrument.
An rit su P /N’s: 905-8 (long);
Z-951102 (short).
Figure 2-4.
2-6
Installation
Step 3.
Remove the inner slide assemblies from
the outer slide assemblies.
Step 4.
Place the left side inner slide assembly
onto the instrument case with the handle
towards the front of the instrument (Figure 2-4).
Step 5.
Insert two green-headed screws through
the holes in the slide assembly behind the
handle and into the metric tapped holes
in the side of the instrument.
Step 6.
Insert two green-headed screws through
the holes near the rear of the slide assembly and into the metric tapped holes in
the side of the instrument.
Step 7.
Insert the two SAE threaded screws (removed from the feet) through the 90° tabs
on the rear of the slide assembly and into
the rear panel of the instrument.
Step 8.
Using the Phillips screwdriver, tighten all
screws holding the left side slide assembly to the instrument chassis.
Rack Mounting Hardware Installation
MG369XB OM
Installation
Rack Mounting Kit Installation
Step 9.
Place the right side inner slide assembly
onto the instrument case with the handle
towards the front of the instrument.
Step 10. Insert two green-headed screws through
the holes in the slide assembly behind the
handle and into the metric tapped holes
in the side of the instrument.
Step 11. Insert two green-headed screws through
the holes near the rear of the slide assembly and into the metric tapped holes in
the side of the instrument.
Step 12. Insert the two SAE threaded screws (removed from the feet) through the 90° tabs
on the rear of the slide assembly and into
the rear panel of the instrument.
Step 13. Using the Phillips screwdriver, tighten all
screws holding the right side slide assembly to the instrument chassis.
Step 14. Using the appropriate hardware, install
the outer slide assemblies onto the equipment rack.
Step 15. Lift the signal generator into position.
Align the inner and outer slide assemblies and slide the instrument into the
rack. Realign the hardware as needed for
smooth operation.
MG369XB OM
2-7
Rack Mounting Kit Installation
Installation
WARNING
When supplying power to this equipment, always use a
three-wire power cable connected to a three-wire power line
outlet. If power is supplied without grounding the equipment in this manner, there is a risk of receiving a severe or
fatal electric shock.
Power
Requirements
The signal generator accepts 90 to 264 Vac, 48 to
440 Hz, single-phase power. Power consumption is
300 VA maximum. The signal generator is intended
for Installation Category (Over Voltage Category) II.
Power
Connection
To connect the MG369XB to the power source, plug
the female end of the power cable into the input line
voltage receptacle on the rear panel (Figure 2-2).
Then plug the male end of the power cord into a
three-wire power line outlet. Turn on the rear panel
power switch. This automatically places the signal
generator in operation (front panel OPERATE LED
on).
Figure 2-2.
2-8
Signal Generator Rear Panel Showing Power Connection
MG369XB OM
Installation
Rack Mounting Kit Installation
CAUTION
Before installing the MG369XB in its operating environment, ensure that all airflow passages at the sides and rear
of the instrument are clear. This is of particular importance
whenever the unit is being rack-mounted.
Keep the cooling fan filters clean so that the ventilation
holes are not obstructed. A blocked fan filter can cause the
instrument to overheat and shut down.
Standby
Operation
Whenever the signal generator is not being used it
should be left connected to the power source and
placed in standby. This keeps the internal time base
frequency reference at operating temperature.
On the front panel, press LINE to switch the
MG369XB from OPERATE (green LED on) to
STANDBY (orange LED on). (Hold the LINE key
down for at least ½ second to prevent power-off of
the unit.)
L in e
O p e ra te
S ta n d b y
NOTE
During standby operation, the fan runs continuously.
L in e K e y
Warmup Time
From Standby–When placing the MG369XB in operation from standby, allow 30 minutes warmup to
assure stable operation.
From a Cold Start (0°C)–The signal generator requires approximately 120 hours (5 days) of warm up
to achieve specified frequency stability with aging.
NOTE
Instruments disconnected from ac power for
more than 72 hours require 30 days to return to
specified aging.
Operating
Environment
MG369XB OM
The MG369XB can be operated within the following
environmental limits.
q
Temperature: 0°C to 50°C
q
Humidity: 5 to 95% relative at 40°C
q
Altitude: up to 4600 meters
q
Cooling: Internal cooling is provided by forced
airflow from the fans mounted on the rear
panel
2-9
GPIB Setup and Interconnection
2-5
GPIB Setup and
Interconnection
Installation
The MG369XB provides automated microwave signal generation via
the GPIB. The following paragraphs provide information about interface connections, cable requirements, setting the GPIB operating parameters, and selecting the external interface language.
Interface
Connector
Interface between the signal generator and other devices on the GPIB is via a 24-wire interface cable.
This cable uses connector shells having two connector faces. These double-faced connectors allow for
the parallel connection of two or more cables to a
single device.
Cable Length
Restrictions
The GPIB can accommodate up to 15 instruments at
any one time. To achieve design performance on the
bus, proper timing and voltage level relationships
must be maintained. If either the cable length between separate instruments or the cumulative cable
length between all instruments is too long, the data
and control lines cannot be driven properly and the
system may fail to perform. Cable length restrictions are as follows:
q
No more than 15 instruments may be installed
on the bus
q
Total cumulative cable length (in meters) may
not exceed two times the number of bus instruments or 20 meters—whichever is less
NOTE
For low EMI applications, the GPIB cable
should be a fully shielded type with wellgrounded metal-shell connectors.
GPIB
Interconnection
2-10
The only interconnection required for GPIB operation is between the signal generator and the controller. This interconnection is via a standard GPIB
cable. The Anritsu part number for such a cable is
2100-1, -2, or -4 (1, 2, or 4 meters in length).
MG369XB OM
Installation
GPIB Setup and Interconnection
Setting the
GPIB Address
The default GPIB address is five. If a different GPIB
address is desired, it can be set from the front panel
using the Configure GPIB menu.
To change the GPIB address, first press the front
panel main menu key labeled System . The System
menu is displayed.
Now press the menu soft-key Config . The System
Configuration menu (shown below) is displayed.
To access the Configure GPIB menu from this menu,
press the menu soft-key GPIB > . The Configure
GPIB menu (shown below) is displayed.
Press the menu soft-key GPIB Address [ADD] to
change the current GPIB address of the signal generator. Enter a new address using the cursor control
keys or the data entry keypad and the terminator
soft-key [ADR]. The new GPIB address will now appear on the display. The entry must be between 1
and 30 to be recognized as a valid GPIB address.
MG369XB OM
2-11
GPIB Setup and Interconnection
Selecting the
Line
Terminator
Installation
Data is delimited on the GPIB by either the carriage
return (CR) ASCII character or both the carriage return and line feed (CR/LF) ASCII characters. Which
character is used depends upon the requirements of
the system controller. Most modern controllers can
use either CR or CR/LF, while many older controllers require one or the other. Consult the controller's
manual for its particular requirements.
From the Configure GPIB menu display, you can select which GPIB terminator to use by pressing the
menu soft-key GPIB Terminator . This menu soft-key
toggles the GPIB terminator between CR and
CR/LF. The current selection appears on the display.
Interface
Language
2-12
The series MG369XB synthesized signal generators
can be remotely operated via the GPIB using an external interface language—Native. The Native interface language uses a set of MG369XB GPIB
product specific commands to control the instrument. Detailed descriptions and a comprehensive
list of these commands can be found in the
MG369XB programming manual, P/N: 10370-10366.
MG369XB OM
Installation
2-6
Preparation for
Storage/Shipment
Preparation for Storage/Shipment
The following paragraphs give instructions for preparing the
MG369XB for storage or shipment.
Preparation
for Storage
Preparing the signal generator for storage consists
of cleaning the unit, packing the inside with moisture-absorbing desiccant crystals, and storing the
unit in a temperature environment that is maintained between –40°C and +75°C.
Preparation
for Shipment
To provide maximum protection against damage in
transit, the signal generator should be repackaged
in the original shipping container. If this container
is no longer available and the unit is being returned
to Anritsu for repair, advise Anritsu Customer Service; they will send a new shipping container free of
charge. In the event neither of these two options is
possible, instructions for packaging and shipment
are given below.
Use a Suitable Container
Obtain a corrugated cardboard carton with a 125 kg
test strength. This carton should have inside dimensions of no less than 15 cm larger than the unit dimensions to allow for cushioning (refer to
Figure 2-1, page 2-4).
Protect the Instrument
Surround the unit with polyethylene sheeting to
protect the finish.
Cushion the Instrument
Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage or urethane foam between the carton
and the unit. Provide at least three inches of dunnage on all sides.
Seal the Container
Seal the carton by using either shipping tape or an
industrial stapler.
Address the Container
If the instrument is being returned to Anritsu for
service, mark the address of the appropriate Anritsu
service center (Table 2-1, following page) and your
return address on the carton in one or more prominent locations.
MG369XB OM
2-13
Anritsu Service Centers
2-7
Anritsu Service
Centers
Table 2-1.
Installation
Table 2-1, below, lists the contact information for Anritsu service centers around the world.
Anritsu Service Centers
UNITED STATES
ANRITSU COMPANY
490 Jarvis Drive
Morgan Hill, CA 95037-2809
Telephone: 1-800-ANRITSU
FAX: 408-776-1744
FRANCE
ANRITSU S.A
9 Avenue du Quebec
Zone de Courtaboeuf
91951 Les Ulis Cedex
Telephone: 016-09-21-550
FAX: 016-44-61-065
GERMANY
ANRITSU COMPANY
10 New Maple Ave., Unit 305
Pine Brook, NJ 07058
Telephone: 1-800-ANRITSU
FAX: 973-575-0092
ANRITSU GmbH
Konrad-Zuse-Platz 1
81829 Muenchen, Germany
Telephone: +49 89 4423080
FAX: +49 89 44230855
INDIA
ANRITSU COMPANY
1155 E. Collins Blvd
Richardson, TX 75081
Telephone: 1-800-ANRITSU
FAX: 972-671-1877
AUSTRALIA
ANRITSU PTY. LTD.
Unit 21/270 Ferntree Gully Road
Notting Hill, Victoria 3168
Australia
Telephone: 03-9558-8177
FAX: 03-9558-8255
BRAZIL
Anritsu Eletrônica Ltda.
Praça Amadeu Amaral 27, 1º andar
Bela Vista, São Paulo, SP, Brasil
CEP: 01327-010
Telephone: 55-11-3283-2511
Fax: 55-11-3288-6940
CANADA
ANRITSU INSTRUMENTS LTD.
700 Silver Seven Road, Suite 120
Kanata, Ontario K2V 1C3
Telephone: (613) 591-2003
FAX: (613) 591-1006
MEERA AGENCIES PVT. LTD.
23 Community Centre
Zamroodpur, Kailash Colony Extension,
New Delhi, India 110 048
Phone: 011-2-6442700/6442800
FAX : 011-2-644250023
ISRAEL
TECH-CENT, LTD.
4 Raul Valenberg St
Tel-Aviv 69719
Telephone: (03) 64-78-563
FAX: (03) 64-78-334
ITALY
ANRITSU Sp.A
Roma Office
Via E. Vittorini, 129
00144 Roma EUR
Telephone: (06) 50-99-711
FAX: (06) 50-22-425
KOREA
ANRITSU CORPORATION LTD.
8F Hyunjuk Building, 832-41
Yeoksam Dong, Kangnam-Ku
Seoul, South Korea 135-080
Telephone: 02-553-6603
FAX: 02-553-6605
JAPAN
ANRITSU CUSTOMER SERVICES
LTD.
5-1-1 Onna Atsugi-shi
Kanagawa-Prf. 243 Japan
Telephone: 0462-96-6688
FAX: 0462-25-8379
SINGAPORE
ANRITSU (SINGAPORE) PTE LTD.
10, Hoe Chiang Road
#07-01/02 Keppel Towers
Singapore 089315
Telephone: 6-282-2400
FAX: 6-282-2533
SOUTH AFRICA
ETECSA
12 Surrey Square Office Park
330 Surrey Avenue
Ferndale, Randburg, 2194
South Africa
Telephone: 27-11-787-7200
FAX: 27-11-787-0446
SWEDEN
ANRITSU AB
Borgafjordsgatan 13
164 40 KISTA, Sweden
Telephone: +46-8-53470700
FAX: +46-8-53470730
TAIWAN
ANRITSU CO., INC.
7F, No. 316, Section 1
NeiHu Road
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Telephone: 886-2-8751-1816
FAX: 886-2-8751-2126
UNITED KINGDOM
ANRITSU LTD.
200 Capability Green
Luton, Bedfordshire
LU1 3LU, England
Telephone: 015-82-433200
FAX: 015-82-731303
CHINA
ANRITSU ELECTRONICS (SHANGHAI) CO.
LTD.
2F, Rm B, 52 Section Factory Building
No. 516 Fu Te Rd (N)
Shanghai 200131 P.R. China
Telephone: 21-5868-0226
FAX: 21-5868-0588
2-14
MG369XB OM
Chapter 3
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Table of Contents
3-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-2
Front Panel Layout. . . . . . . .
Line Key . . . . . . . . . .
Data Display Area . . . . .
Data Entry Area . . . . . .
RF Output Control Key . . .
RF Output Connector. . . .
3-3
Data Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Menu Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Menu Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-4
Data Entry Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-5
Instrument Start-Up . . . . . . . . .
Powering Up the MG369XB . . .
Start-Up Display . . . . . . . .
Standby Operation . . . . . . .
Self-Testing the MG369XB . . .
Resetting to Default Parameters .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-6
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Parameter . .
Editing the Current Value .
Entering a New Value . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-17
3-17
3-18
3-19
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
Table of Contents (Continued)
3-2
3-7
CW Frequency Operation. . . . .
Selecting CW Mode . . . . .
Selecting a CW Frequency . .
Selecting a Power Level . . .
CW Ramp . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Offset . . . . . . . .
Electronic Frequency Control
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-8
Sweep Frequency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Analog Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . .
Setting Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Step Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Step Size, Dwell Time, and Sweep Time
Selecting a Sweep Trigger . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Manual Sweep Mode. . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Alternate Sweep Mode . . . . . . . .
List Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting List Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . .
List Frequency Editing . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Power Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a List Sweep Range . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a List Sweep Trigger . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-26
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-36
3-36
3-38
3-42
3-43
3-45
3-46
3-48
3-49
3-9
Fixed Power Level Operation. . . . . .
Selecting Fixed Power Level Mode .
Selecting a Power Level . . . . . .
Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-51
3-51
3-51
3-54
3-10 Power Level Sweep Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting CW Power Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting CW Power Sweep Step Size and Dwell Time . . .
Selecting a CW Power Sweep Trigger . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Power Level Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode . . . . .
Setting Power Level Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-56
3-56
3-57
3-57
3-59
3-61
3-62
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
MG369XB OM
Table of Contents (Continued)
3-11 Leveling Operations . . . . . .
Selecting a Leveling Mode .
Attenuator Decoupling . .
ALC Power Slope . . . . .
User Cal (User Power Level
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
Flatness Calibration)
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-63
3-63
3-67
3-68
3-70
3-12 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the System Configuration Menu .
Configuring the Front Panel . . . . . . .
Configuring the Rear Panel . . . . . . . .
Configuring the RF . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the GPIB . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Increment Sizes . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-76
3-76
3-77
3-78
3-79
3-81
3-84
3-13 Saving/Recalling Instrument Setups.
Saving Setups . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Setups . . . . . . . .
Erasing Stored Setups. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-85
3-85
3-86
3-86
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
3-14 Secure Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Memory Profile and Security Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3-15 Reference Loop Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Reference Oscillator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Reference Loop Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3-16 Signal Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Accessing Modulation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Amplitude Modulation Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Providing Amplitude Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Frequency Modulation Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Providing Frequency Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Phase Modulation Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
Providing Phase Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Pulse Modulation Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
Providing Pulse Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
3-17 Internal Power Meter (Option 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
3-18 Scan Modulation (Option 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
MG369XB OM
3-3/3-4
Chapter 3
Local (Front Panel) Operation
3-1
Introduction
This chapter provides information and instructions on operating the
series MG369XB synthesized signal generator using the front panel
controls. It contains the following:
q
Illustrations and diagrams of the front panel, data display area,
and data entry area that identify and describe all front panel
controls
q
An annotated diagram of the menu display format showing
where the current frequency and power level information is displayed
q
Instructions for performing signal generator operations; namely,
frequency and frequency sweep, fixed power level and power level
sweep, leveling, system configuration, and saving and recalling
instrument setups
Typographic
Conventions
The typographic conventions used throughout this
chapter are as follows:
q
The main function keys (Frequency, Level,
Modulation, and System) are identified by
using reverse text, for example: Frequency
q
Menu soft-keys are identified by using a grey
background, for example: Edit F1
q
Instrument status and warning messages are
shown as they appear on the display, for example: CW Ramp and Cold
Related GPIB commands are listed in brackets
immediately following the menu soft-key, for
example, to turn on the CW Ramp:
Press CW Ramp [CS1]
q
Refer to the MG369XB GPIB programming
manual, P/N: 10370-10366, for information on
using GPIB commands
MG369XB OM
3-5
Front Panel Layout
3-2
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Front Panel Layout
The MG369XB front panel is divided into two main areas—the data
display area and the data entry area. The following paragraphs provide a brief description of the front panel controls and data display
and data entry areas as shown in Figure 3-1. Detailed descriptions of
the data display and data entry areas are contained in Sections 3-3
and 3-4.
D a ta D is p la y
R F O u tp u t
C o n tro l
K e y
D a ta E n try
F re q u e n c y
C le a r
E n try
B a c k
S p a c e
L e v e l
8
9
S y s te m
4
5
6
1
2
0
L in e
L in e
K e y
Figure 3-1.
O u tp u t
7
M o d u la tio n
.
3
O n O ff
R F O u tp u t
5 0 9
+ /-
O p e ra te
S ta n d b y
R F O u tp u t
C o n n e c to r
M e n u
K e y s
Front Panel, MG369XB Synthesized Signal Generator
Line Key
The line key provides for turning the signal generator on and off. STANDBY (off) is indicated by an orange LED; OPERATE (on) by a green LED.
Data Display
Area
The data display area consists of the data display
and the surrounding menu keys.
Data Display
The data display provides information about the
current status of the MG369XB in a menu display
format. This information includes the operating
mode of the instrument and the value of the active
frequency and power level parameters.
Menu Keys
Menu keys provide for selecting the operating mode,
parameters, and configuration of the signal generator.
3-6
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Front Panel Layout
Data Entry
Area
The data entry area consists of data entry keys and
controls that provide for changing values for each
MG369XB parameter.
RF Output
Control Key
The RF output control key provides for turning the
RF output power on and off. OUTPUT OFF is indicated by a red LED; OUTPUT ON by a yellow LED.
RF Output
Connector
The RF output connector provides RF output from a
50W source.
NOTE
To prevent power losses due to an impedance
mismatch, the mating connector and cable
should also be rated at 50W.
MG369XB OM
3-7
Data Display Area
3-3
Data Display Area
Local (Front Panel) Operation
The data display area consists of the data display and the surrounding
menu keys. The data display is a liquid crystal display (LCD).
Information is presented on the LCD in the form of menu displays.
The menu keys either select the main menu to be displayed, select a
sub-menu of the current menu display, or control a function on the
current menu display.
Figure 3-2 shows the format of the menu display and identifies the
display elements. It also shows the placement of the menu keys in
relation to the display. The paragraphs that follow provide
descriptions of the menu display elements and the menu keys.
F re q u e n c y
M o d e
T itle B a r
F re q u e n c y
P a ra m e te rs
A re a
L e v e l M o d e
T itle B a r
L e v e l
P a ra m e te rs
A re a
M e n u L a b e ls
S id e K e y s
F re q u e n c y
L e v e l
In s tru m e n t
W a r n in g /S ta tu s
A re a
M a in M e n u
K e y s
M o d u la tio n
S y s te m
M e n u
S o ft-K e y s
M o d u
T itle
a n
S ta tu s
Figure 3-2.
3-8
la tio n
B a rs
d
A re a
M e n u
S o ft-K e y s
M e n u L a b e ls
B o tto m K e y s
Front Panel Data Display Area
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Menu Display
Format
Data Display Area
The menu display is divided into specific areas that
show the frequency and power level information for
the current signal generator setup. Menu labels for
the current menu's soft-keys appear along the
bottom and right side of the display.
Title Bars
A shaded title bar identifies each parameter area.
Operation mode information is displayed on the title
bars.
q
Frequency Mode Title Bar—The current
frequency mode (CW, Step Sweep, Manual
Sweep, or List Sweep) appears on the left side
of the bar. In the step and list sweep mode, the
type of sweep trigger appears on the right side
q
Level Mode Title Bar—The current power
level mode (Level or Level Sweep) appears on
the left side of the bar. In a level sweep mode,
the type of sweep trigger appears on the right
side of the bar
q
Modulation Title Bars—Each type of signal
modulation (AM, FM/FM, and Pulse) has a
separate title bar on the display
Parameter Areas
The parameter areas show the frequency and power
level information for the current MG369XB setup.
MG369XB OM
q
Frequency Parameters Area—The current
CW frequency in GHz, the start and stop frequencies of the current frequency sweep range
in GHz, the current list index and frequency, or
the start and stop indexes for the list sweep
are displayed in this area
q
Power Level Parameters Area—The current power level in dBm or mV, or the start
and stop levels of the current power level
sweep range in dBm or mV are displayed in
this area
q
Modulation Status Areas—This area displays the modulation status for the current
setup
3-9
Data Display Area
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Instrument Warning/Status Areas
These areas show instrument warning and status
messages. For example, the message COLD indicates that the 100 MHz crystal oven has not yet
reached a stable operating temperature.
Menu Labels
Each of the menu soft-keys, located at the bottom
and right edge of the display, has a corresponding
menu label area on the display. These labels identify
the function of the soft-keys for the current menu
display. In most cases, when a menu soft-key is
pressed, its menu label changes appearance to visually show the On/Off condition.
Window Display
A window display that overlays a portion of the current menu display is used to:
q
Show the parameter being edited
q
Display selection lists of preset frequencies
power levels, markers, etc.
q
Show the system configuration choices and
current selections
q
Show self-test error messages
A typical window display is shown to the left.
Menu Keys
3-10
As shown in Figure 3-2 on page 3-8, there are two
types of menu keys that affect the data display—main menu hard-keys and menu soft-keys.
The main menu hard-keys are positioned to the far
right of the data display and do not change their
function. The menu soft-keys are located next to the
data display at the bottom and to the right of the
display and change their function depending on the
mode of operation and menu selection.
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Data Display Area
Main Menu Keys
Each of the main menu keys, shown to the left, selects a main (top-level) menu display. These menus
let you select the operating mode and configuration
of the instrument. Main menu keys are identified
throughout this manual by using reverse text, for
example: Frequency . A brief functional description
of each main menu follows.
F re q u e n c y
L e v e l
q
Frequency—This menu lets you select between CW, Analog Sweep, Step Sweep, Manual
Sweep, and List Sweep frequency modes
q
Level—This menu lets you select power level
and ALC modes (Level, Level Sweep, Level Offset, ALC on or off, internal or external ALC,
ALC/attenuator decoupling, ALC slope, and
user level flatness correction)
q
Modulation—This menu lets you select modulation modes (AM, FM, FM, and Pulse) when
the option is installed
q
System—This menu provides you with access
to sub-menus that let you:
M o d u la tio n
S y s te m
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
Reset the instrument to factory-selected
default values
Configure the front panel, rear panel, RF,
and GPIB
Set incremental sizes for editing frequency,
power level, and time parameters
Save or recall instrument setups
Disable front panel data display
Perform instrument self-test
Perform reference oscillator calibration
Menu Soft-Keys
As shown to the left, six menu soft-keys are located
below the data display and six menu soft-keys are
located to the right of the data display. In general,
the menu soft-keys located below the data display
select a sub-menu of the current main (top-level)
menu display; the menu soft-keys located to the
right of the data display either control a function on
the current menu display or select an additional
sub-menu. Menu labels that identify the current
function of each soft-key are shown on the menu display adjacent to the soft-keys. Menu soft-keys are
identified throughout this manual by using a gray
background, for example: Edit F1 .
MG369XB OM
3-11
Data Entry Area
3-4
Data Entry Area
Local (Front Panel) Operation
The value of a selected MG369XB parameter can be changed using the
rotary data knob, cursor control keys, or keys of the data entry area.
Each element of the data entry area is identified in Figure 3-3 and described in the following paragraphs.
C le a r
E n try
K e y
C u rs o r
C o n tro l
K e y s
C le a r
E n try
B a c k
S p a c e
7
8
9
4
5
6
B a c k
S p a c e
K e y
K e y p a d
R o ta ry
D a ta
K n o b
Figure 3-3.
0
2
.
3
+ /-
Front Panel Data Entry Area
NOTE
The cursor does not appear with the increment
mode toggled ON. The increment menu is selected
via: System | Config | Increment > .
3-12
1
Cursor Control Keys
In general, this diamond-shaped key cluster controls
the movement of the cursor on the display. When a
parameter is opened for editing, a cursor appears
under the open parameter. Each time the < or > pad
is pressed, the cursor moves left or right by one
digit. The Ù or Ú pad can then be used to increase or
decrease the value of the parameter. The unit size of
the increase or decrease that occurs each time the Ù
or Ú pad is pressed is determined by the cursor position.
In addition, when editing frequency, power level,
and time parameters, the incremental size can be
set to a specific value using the system
configuration increment menu (page 3-84). Once set
and activated, each time the Ù or Ú pad is pressed,
the parameter's value increases or decreases by the
set amount.
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Data Entry Area
Rotary Data Knob
The rotary data knob can be used to change the
value of a parameter that is open for editing. The
cursor is moved under the open parameter using the
< and > cursor control keys. Then, by slowly turning
the knob clockwise or counterclockwise the value of
the parameter is increased or decreased by the unit
size. The unit size is determined by the cursor placement. Turning the knob rapidly changes the value of
the parameter in larger steps.
When editing frequency, power level, and time parameters, the incremental size can be set to a specific value using the system configuration increment
menu (page 3-84). Once set and activated, each time
the knob is turned clockwise or counter-clockwise,
the parameter's value increases or decreases by the
set amount.
Keypad
The numeric keypad provides for entering frequency,
power level, time, and number-of-steps parameters
and GPIB address values. The “+/–” key functions as
a “change sign” key during any keypad entry.
Clear Entry Key
When a parameter is open for editing, the clear entry key is used to clear the parameter entry.
Back Space Key
The back space key is used to correct keypad data
entry errors by deleting the last number, “–”, or decimal point entered.
Termination Soft-Keys
Termination soft-keys are used to terminate keypad
data entries and change the parameter values in
memory. As shown on the left, termination soft-keys
are located on the right side of the menu display. If
the entered value is outside the allowable range of
the open parameter, an error message will be displayed along with an audible “beep.” The frequency,
time, and power level termination soft-keys are:
GHz / MHz / kHz / Hz
Sec / ms / ms / ns
dB / dBm / dB mV (in log power level mode)
V / mV / mV (in linear power level mode)
MG369XB OM
3-13
Instrument Start-Up
3-5
Instrument Start-Up
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Now that you have familiarized yourself with the layout of the signal
generator's front panel controls and data display, you are ready to begin operating the instrument. Begin by powering it up.
Powering Up
the MG369XB
Connect the MG369XB to an ac power source by following the installation procedure in Chapter 2. This
automatically places the instrument in operation
(front panel OPERATE LED on).
Start-Up
Display
During power up, the message Please Wait...
LOADING PROGRAMS appears on the data display.
When all programs have been loaded, the start-up
screen (below) is displayed. It provides you with the
model number of the signal generator and the revision level of the installed firmware.
MG3696B
RF/Microwave Signal Generator
Firmware Version 1.00
COPYRIGHT 2000 - 2004 Anritsu Co.
The MG369XB then returns to the exact configuration it was in when last set to Standby.
Standby
Operation
Whenever the signal generator is not being used, it
should be left connected to the power source and
placed in standby. Standby operation provides power
to keep the internal time base at operating temperature. This assures specified frequency accuracy and
stability when the MG369XB is placed in operation.
NOTE
During standby operation, the fans run continuously at low speed.
Press LINE (for ½ second minimum) to switch from
OPERATE (green LED) to STANDBY (orange LED).
L in e
O p e ra te
S ta n d b y
L in e K e y
3-14
NOTE
When switching to operate from standby, allow
at least a 30-minute warmup before beginning
signal generator operations.
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Instrument Start-Up
Self-Testing
the MG369XB
The MG369XB firmware includes internal diagnostics that self-test the instrument. These self-test diagnostics perform a brief go/no-go test of most of the
PCBs and other internal assemblies. If the signal
generator fails self-test, an error message is displayed on the data display. Error messages and descriptions are listed in Chapter 6—Operator
Maintenance.
CAUTION
During self- test with RF OUTPUT set to ON, the output
power level is set to 0 dBm. Always disconnect sensitive
equipment from the unit before performing self-test.
You can perform a self-test of the signal generator at
any time during normal operation. To perform a
self-test from any menu, press System . Then, when
the System menu (shown below) is displayed, press
Selftest .
Resetting to
Default
Parameters
You can reset the MG369XB to the factory-selected
default parameter values at any time during normal
operation. Table 3-1, page 3-16, lists the default parameters for all MG369XB models.
NOTE
Resetting the instrument clears the current
setup parameters. If these parameter values
are needed for future testing, save them as a
stored setup before resetting the signal generator. (For information on saving/recalling instrument setups, refer to page 3-85.)
To reset the signal generator, press System . When
the System menu (above) is displayed, press Reset .
MG369XB OM
3-15
Instrument Start-Up
Table 3-1.
MODEL
NUMBER
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Reset (Default) Parameters
FREQUENCY PARAMETERS (GHz)
F0
F1
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
DF
*
5.0
8.0
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
1.0
*
*
5.0
8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0
*
*
5.0
8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0
*
*
5.0
8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0
*
*
5.0
8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0
*
*
5.0
8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
M0
*
5.0
8.0
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
3.5 2.0
*
*
5.0
8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 20.0 2.0
*
*
*
*
5.0
8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 40.0 2.0
*
*
5.0
8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 50.0 2.0
*
*
5.0
8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 67.0 2.0
*
F3
M3
F4
MG3691B 3.5 2.0
F2
8.4 2.0
MG3692B 3.5 2.0 20.0 2.0
MG3693B 3.5 2.0 30.0 2.0
MG3694B 3.5 2.0 40.0 2.0
MG3695B 3.5 2.0 50.0 2.0
MG3696B 3.5 2.0 67.0 2.0
5.0
M1
*
M2
8.4 2.0
8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 30.0 2.0
* 2.2 GHz for units with Option 4
MODEL
NUMBER
POWER LEVEL PARAMETERS (dBm)
L0
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9
MG3691B
+1.0
0.0
–1.0
–2.0
–3.0
–4.0
–5.0
–6.0
–7.0
–8.0
MG3692B
+1.0
0.0
–1.0
–2.0
–3.0
–4.0
–5.0
–6.0
–7.0
–8.0
MG3693B
+1.0
0.0
–1.0
–2.0
–3.0
–4.0
–5.0
–6.0
–7.0
–8.0
MG3694B
+1.0
0.0
–1.0
–2.0
–3.0
–4.0
–5.0
–6.0
–7.0
–8.0
MG3695B
+1.0
0.0
–1.0
–2.0
–3.0
–4.0
–5.0
–6.0
–7.0
–8.0
MG3696B
+1.0
0.0
–1.0
–2.0
–3.0
–4.0
–5.0
–6.0
–7.0
–8.0
STEP SWEEP
MODEL
NUMBER
SWEEP
TIME
MG3691B
LEVEL SWEEP
LEVEL
OFFSET
DWELL TIME
NUMBER OF
STEPS
DWELL TIME
NUMBER OF
STEPS
50 ms
1 ms
50
50 ms
50
0.0 dB
MG3692B
50 ms
1 ms
50
50 ms
50
0.0 dB
MG3693B
50 ms
1 ms
50
50 ms
50
0.0 dB
MG3694B
50 ms
1 ms
50
50 ms
50
0.0 dB
MG3695B
50 ms
1 ms
50
50 ms
50
0.0 dB
MG3696B
50 ms
1 ms
50
50 ms
50
0.0 dB
3-16
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
3-6
Entering Data
Entering Data
Before proceeding to the various modes of signal generator operation,
you need to know how to enter data from the front panel. Entering
data refers to changing a parameter's value by editing its current
value or entering a new value to replace the current value. The following instructions describe how to (1) open a parameter, (2) edit its current value, and (3) enter a new value.
A typical MG369XB menu display (below) is used throughout the data
entry instructions. At this menu display, you can edit both the CW frequency and the output power level parameters.
If you wish to follow along on your MG369XB, you can obtain this
same menu display by resetting your instrument (press System , then
press Reset ).
Opening the
Parameter
In order for the value of a parameter to be changed,
the parameter must first be opened.
To open the frequency parameter from the above
menu, press Edit F1 . The menu display changes
(below) to show that the menu soft-key Edit F1 has
been pressed and that the frequency parameter has
been opened. An open parameter is indicated by
placing it in a window with a movable cursor under
its digits. If the cursor is not displayed, you must deactivate increment mode (refer to page 3-84).
MG369XB OM
3-17
Entering Data
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Only one parameter can be open at a time. If you
press Edit L1 , then the frequency parameter will
close and the power level parameter will open.
Editing the
Current Value
C u rs o r C o n tro l K e y s
R o ta ry D a ta K n o b
To change the current value of a parameter by editing, you can also use either the cursor control keys
or the rotary data knob.
Using the Cursor Control Keys
Using the < and > cursor control keys, move the cursor under the digit where you want to begin editing.
Then increase or decrease the value of the parameter using the Ù or Ú cursor control keys. The unit
size of the increase or decrease that occurs each
time the Ù or Ú pad is pressed is determined by the
cursor position.
Using the Rotary Data Knob
You can also increase or decrease the value of the
parameter using the rotary data knob. Once you
have positioned the cursor under the digit where
you want to begin editing, slowly turn the knob
clockwise or counter-clockwise to increase or decrease the value of the parameter by the unit size.
Turning the knob rapidly changes the value of the
parameter in larger steps.
Using a Set Increment
When editing frequency, power level, and time parameters, you can increase or decrease the parameter's value by a set amount each time the Ù or Ú pad
is pressed or the rotary data knob is turned clockwise or counter-clockwise. For instructions on setting the increment size, refer to page 3-84.
Now, try changing the current value of the CW frequency displayed on your instrument from 2.0 GHz
to 6.395 GHz. Use both the cursor control key Ù and
Ú pads and the rotary data knob to make the value
changes. When you are finished, your menu display
should look like the example on the following page.
To close the open parameter when you are finished
editing, press Edit F1 or make another menu selection.
3-18
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Entering a
New Value
B a c k
S p a c e
K e y
C le a r
E n try
K e y
C le a r
E n try
B a c k
S p a c e
7
4
1
8
9
5
6
0
2
3
.
+ /-
K e y p a d
Entering Data
To change the current value of a parameter by entering a new value for the parameter, use the data
entry keypad and termination keys.
As soon as you press one of the keys on the data entry keypad, the current parameter display clears for
entry of a new value. Enter the new value for the
parameter, then press the appropriate terminator
soft-key to store it in memory. If the entered value is
outside the allowable range of the open parameter,
the entry is not accepted and the previous value for
the parameter is displayed.
If you make an error during data entry, either (1)
press Back Space to delete the entry one character
at a time starting from the last character entered, or
(2) delete the entire entry by pressing Clear Entry .
Then, re-enter the correct value.
Now, try entering a new value for the CW frequency
displayed on your MG369XB using the data entry
keypad and termination soft-keys.
NOTE
A frequency entry may be terminated in GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz;
however, it is always displayed on
the data display in GHz. A time entry may be terminated in Sec, ms,
ms, or ns; however, it is always displayed on the data display in Sec.
To close the open parameter when you are finished
entering data, press Edit F1 or make another menu
selection.
MG369XB OM
3-19
CW Frequency Operation
3-7
CW Frequency
Operation
NOTE
When the signal generator is reset,
it automatically comes up operating in the CW frequency mode.
Local (Front Panel) Operation
One of the signal generator's major functions is to produce discrete
CW frequencies across the frequency range of the instrument. The following paragraphs describe how to place the MG369XB in the CW frequency mode, select a CW frequency and power level for output, and
activate the CW ramp and Phase Offset menus and functions. Use the
CW Frequency Mode menu map (Chapter 4, Figure 4-2) to follow the
menu sequences.
Selecting CW
Mode
To place the MG369XB in the CW frequency mode,
press Frequency . At the resulting menu display,
press CW . The CW menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
Selecting a
CW Frequency
3-20
q
Select a CW frequency for output
q
Copy the current frequency and power level information to the current list index. (Refer to
page 3-42 for the list sweep frequency mode operating instructions)
q
Access the master-slave menu. (Refer to
page 7-4 for Master-Slave mode operating instructions)
q
Select an output power level for the CW frequency
q
Select the Phase Offset menu
q
Select the CW Ramp menu
There are several ways to select a CW frequency for
output. You can (1) edit the current frequency, (2)
enter a new frequency, or (3) select one of the 20 preset frequency parameters.
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
CW Frequency Operation
Editing the Current Frequency
Press Edit F1 [F1] to open the frequency parameter,
then edit the current CW frequency using the cursor
control keys or the rotary data knob. To close the
open frequency parameter, press Edit F1 or make
another menu selection.
Entering a New Frequency
Press Edit F1 [F1] to open the frequency parameter,
then enter the new CW frequency using the keypad
and appropriate terminator key. To close the open
frequency parameter, press Edit F1 or make another menu selection.
Selecting a Preset Frequency
To select one of the preset frequencies for output,
press the soft-key Frequency Control > . The CW
Frequency Control menu, shown below, is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Select preset frequencies F0 [CF0], F1 [CF1], F2
[CF2], M1 [CM1], or M2 [CM2] for output
q
Edit each preset frequency
q
Access the Frequency List menu (to tag, edit,
or output a frequency from the list)
q
Select a tagged frequency from the frequency
list (tagging is described below) for output using the Scan Up or Scan Down keys
q
Select an output power level for the CW frequency
Press < Previous to return to the CW menu display.
MG369XB OM
3-21
CW Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Frequency List—To access the Frequency List
menu (below), press Frequency List... from the Frequency Control menu. This menu lets you tag, edit,
or output a frequency from the list.
Use the cursor control keys to select a frequency
from the frequency list. The selected frequency is
highlighted in reverse video and displayed in full below the frequency list.
Press Tag Selected to tag a selected frequency
(places an F in front of the tagged frequency). If the
frequency is already tagged, pressing Tag Selected
will un-tag the frequency (remove the F). Tagging
selected frequencies lets you quickly switch between
them using the scan soft-keys of the CW Frequency
Control menu.
Press Edit Selected to edit the selected frequency or
enter a new frequency.
Press Output Frequency to output the selected frequency. On the frequency list, the output frequency
selection is marked by (a black square) or, if
tagged, an F (highlighted in reverse video). This
frequency is output until you select another frequency from the list and press Output Frequency .
Return to the CW Frequency Control menu display
by pressing < Previous .
Selecting a
Power Level
3-22
While in the CW frequency mode, you can edit the
current CW frequency output power level or enter a
new output power level.
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
CW Frequency Operation
Editing the Current Power Level
Press Edit L1 [XL1] to open the power level parameter, then edit the current power level using the cursor control keys or rotary data knob. To close the
open power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make
another menu selection.
Entering a New Power Level
Press Edit L1 [XL1] to open the power level parameter, then enter the new power level using the keypad
and appropriate terminator key. To close the open
power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make another menu selection.
NOTE
You can also select any of the preset power levels or a power level sweep for a CW frequency.
For instructions, refer to Section 3-9 (Fixed
Power Level Operation) and Section 3-10
(Power Level Sweep Operation).
CW Ramp
When active, the MG369XB's CW ramp provides a
repetitive 0V to 10V ramp output to the rear panel
HORIZ OUT BNC connector and AUX I/O connector,
pin 1. The CW ramp is used to drive a scalar analyzer display.
To turn on the CW ramp from the CW menu, press
CW Ramp> to access the CW Ramp menu (below)
and press CW Ramp [CS1].
While the CW ramp is on, the message CW Ramp
appears on the right side of the frequency title bar
on all CW menus.
Press CW Ramp [CS0] again to turn the CW ramp
off.
MG369XB OM
3-23
CW Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Phase Offset
When active, the MG369XB's RF output will be
phase shifted by the specified amount displayed in
the phase offset parameter. The phase offset range
is -360° to +360° with a resolution of 0.1°.
NOTE
The phase offset function is available in CW operating mode only.
To activate the phase offset from the CW menu,
press Phase Offset> to access the Phase Offset
menu (below) and press Phase Offset [PS1].
To turn off the phase offset, press Phase Offset .
[PS0] from the phase offset menu.
To edit the phase offset value, press Edit Offset
[PSO] button from the phase offset menu (below),
then use the cursor keys or rotary knob to edit the
phase offset or use the keypad to enter a new value.
Press Edit Offset to close the open parameter.
3-24
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
CW Frequency Operation
While the phase offset is on, the phase offset value
is displayed in the CW menu (below).
The phase offset value may be zeroed. This allows
you to normalize the phase offset display as appropriate.
To zero the phase offset display from the phase offset menu, press Zero Display [PSZ] (below).
NOTE
Adjusting the phase offset zero display does not
affect the phase shift of the RF output.
Electronic
Frequency
Control
MG369XB OM
Additional frequency control is provided by the Electronic Frequency Control circuit via the EFC IN
BNC connector on the rear panel. This circuit provides an external dc feedback point and the capability to frequency modulate the internal reference
crystal oscillator. This allows phase locking of the
signal generator’s RF output by means of an external phase locked loop. Refer to Appendix A, Rear
Panel Connectors, for more information.
3-25
Sweep Frequency Operation
3-8
Sweep Frequency
Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
The signal generator can generate broad (full range) and narrow band
sweeps across the frequency range of the instrument. The MG369XB
has four sweep frequency modes—analog sweep, step sweep, manual
sweep, and list sweep. Descriptions and operating instructions for the
analog sweep frequency mode begins on this page. Step sweep frequency mode descriptions and operating instructions begin on
page 3-28. Manual sweep frequency mode descriptions and operating
instructions begin on page 3-32. List sweep frequency mode descriptions and operating instructions begin on page 3-42. Use the Analog
Sweep, Step Sweep, Manual Sweep, and List Sweep frequency mode
menu maps (Chapter 4, Figures 4-3, through 4-6) to follow the menu
sequences.
Analog Sweep
Mode
In analog sweep frequency mode, the MG369XB's
output frequency is swept between selected start
and stop frequencies. Sweep width can be set from
1 MHz to the full frequency range of the signal generator. Sweep time can be set for any time in the
range of 30 ms to 99 sec. The lower frequency limit
for analog sweeps is 10 MHz (500 MHz with Option 4).
When the sweep width of the analog sweep is
>100 MHz, the sweep is phase-lock corrected at both
the start and stop frequencies and at each band
switch point. When the sweep width is £100 MHz,
only the center frequency is phase-lock corrected.
Selecting
Analog Sweep
Mode
3-26
To place the MG369XB in analog sweep frequency
mode, press Frequency . At the resulting menu display, press Analog Sweep [SWP]. The Analog
Sweep menu (below) is then displayed.
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Sweep Frequency Operation
This menu lets you perform the following:
Setting Sweep
Time
q
Select a sweep range
q
Set the sweep time
q
Access the Trigger menu
q
Select an output power level for the sweep
q
Access the Alternate Sweep menu
To set the analog sweep time, from the Analog
Sweep menu, press Sweep Time [SWT].
Edit the current sweep time using the cursor control
keys, the rotary data knob, or enter a new sweep
time using the key pad and appropriate termination
key. To close the open sweep time parameter once
you have set the desired sweep time, press
Sweep Time or make another menu selection.
To access the Analog Sweep Trigger menu from this
menu, press Trigger > . From the Trigger menu, you
can select one of three trigger modes:
q
Auto
q
External
q
Single
The trigger modes are described on page 3-31.
To access the Alternate Sweep menu, press
Alternate Sweep > . The Alternate Sweep modes are
described on page 3-38.
Press < Previous to return to the Analog Sweep
menu display.
MG369XB OM
3-27
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Step Sweep
Mode
In step sweep frequency mode, the output frequency
changes in discrete, synthesized steps between the
selected start and stop frequencies. Step sweeps can
be from a low frequency to a high frequency and
from a high frequency to a low frequency. Step
sweeps can be selected to be linear or logarithmic.
The sweep width can be set from 0.01 Hz to the full
frequency range of the instrument.
The step size or number of steps between the sweep
start and stop frequencies, the dwell-time-per-step,
the sweep time, the type of step sweep (linear or logarithmic), and sweep trigger are controllable from
step sweep menus.
Selecting Step
Sweep Mode
To place the MG369XB in step sweep frequency
mode, press Frequency . At the resulting menu display, press Step Sweep [SSP]. The Step Sweep
menu (below) is then displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
3-28
q
Select a sweep range (edit the sweep start and
stop frequency parameters)
q
Set the dwell-time-per-step
q
Set the step size
q
Select an output power level for the sweep
q
Access the additional step sweep menu (set the
sweep time, set the number of steps, access the
Trigger menu, select log or linear sweep, and
access the alternate sweep menu)
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Setting Step
Size, Dwell
Time, and
Sweep Time
Sweep Frequency Operation
In linear step sweep, the sweep is linearly incremented (or decremented) by the step size from the
start frequency to the stop frequency. There are two
ways to set the size of each step of the linear step
sweep—set the step size or set the number of steps.
The step size range is 0.01 Hz to the full frequency
range of the instrument; the number of steps range
is 1 to 10,000. If the step size does not divide into
the frequency range, the last step is truncated.
In logarithmic step sweep, step size increases logarithmically with the frequency and is determined by
a logarithmic curve between the sweep start and
stop frequencies and the number of steps. The
number of steps can range from 1 to 10,000.
The dwell-time-per-step of the step sweep can be set
for any time in the range of 1 ms to 99 sec. When
dwell-time-per-step, step size or number of steps is
set, the sweep time equals dwell-time-per-step times
the number of steps plus the total phase-locking
time for all the step frequencies. If sweep time is set,
then dwell-time-per-step is the result of the sweep
time divided by the number of steps. In this case,
the resultant minimum dwell time must be ³10 ms
to allow for phase-locking of each step frequency.
The sweep time of the step sweep can be set for any
time in the range of 20 ms to 99 sec.
Press Dwell Time [SDT] to open the dwell time-perstep parameter.
Press Step Size [SYZ] to open the step size parameter.
Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
the current value using the cursor control keys, the
rotary data knob or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination soft-key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or make another menu
selection.
MG369XB OM
3-29
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Press More > to access the Additional Step Sweep
menu (below).
This menu lets you perform the following:
RANGE
This error message is displayed
when (1) the step size value entered
is greater than the sweep range, (2)
the number of steps entered results
in a step size of less than 0.01 Hz, or
(3) the sweep time entered divided
by the number of steps entered results in a dwell time of <10 ms. Entering valid values will clear the error.
q
Set the sweep time
q
Set the number of steps
q
Access the Trigger menu
q
Select log or linear sweep
q
Access the Alternate Sweep menu
Press Sweep Time [SWT] to open the sweep time
parameter.
Press Num of Steps [SNS] to open the number of
steps parameter.
Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
the current value using the cursor control keys, the
rotary data knob, or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination soft-key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or make another menu
selection.
Press Trigger > to access the Step Sweep Trigger
menu. The trigger menu lets you select the following
sweep trigger modes:
q
Auto
q
External
q
Single
The trigger modes are described on page 3-31.
3-30
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Sweep Frequency Operation
To access the Alternate Sweep menu, press
Alternate Sweep > . The Alternate Sweep modes are
described on page 3-38.
Press Log/Linear [LGS/LIS] to select logarithmic or
linear step sweep operation. The soft-key label is
highlighted (in reverse video) to reflect your selection.
Press < Previous to return to the Step Sweep menu
display.
Selecting a
Sweep Trigger
MG369XB OM
There are three modes of sweep triggering for analog and step frequency sweep—automatic, external,
and single. The sweep trigger is selectable from the
trigger menu. The following is a description of each
mode:
q
Auto (Automatic)–The sweep continually
sweeps from its start frequency to its stop frequency with optimal retrace time
q
External–The sweep recurs when triggered by
an external TTL-compatible clock pulse to the
rear panel AUX I/O connector
q
Single–A single sweep starts when the trigger
key is pressed. If a sweep is in progress when
the key is pressed, it aborts and resets
3-31
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
To access the Sweep Trigger menu (below) from either the Analog Sweep or Step Sweep menus, press
Trigger > .
Select a sweep trigger mode as follows:
q
Press Auto [AUT] to select automatic triggering
q
Press External [HWT] to select external triggering
q
Press Single [EXT] to select single sweep triggering
A message showing the sweep trigger mode selected
appears on the right side of frequency title bar.
If you select the single sweep trigger mode, the
menu display adds the menu soft-key Trigger .
Pressing Trigger [TRG or TRS] starts a single
sweep. If a single sweep is in progress, pressing
Trigger [RSS] causes the sweep to abort and reset.
Press < Previous to return to the Additional Step
Sweep menu.
Manual Sweep In manual sweep frequency mode, the output frequency can be manually tuned in phase-locked steps
Mode
between the selected start and stop frequencies using the cursor control keys or rotary data knob. As
the knob is turned or the Ù or Ú cursor control pads
pressed, the current output frequency is incremented by the step size and displayed on the data
display as Fm. The step size or number of steps between the start and stop frequencies are controllable from the manual sweep menu. The step size
range is 0.01 Hz to the full frequency range of the
instrument; the number of steps range is 1 to
10,000.
3-32
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Sweep Frequency Operation
To place the MG369XB in manual sweep frequency
Selecting
Manual Sweep mode, press Frequency . At the resulting menu display, press Manual Sweep [MAN]. The Manual
Mode
Sweep menu (below) is then displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
Selecting a
Sweep Range
MG369XB OM
q
Select a sweep range (edit the start and stop
frequency parameters)
q
Set the step size or number of steps (previously
described on page 3-29)
Selecting a sweep range involves choosing a start
and a stop frequency for the frequency sweep. The
sweep range selection process is identical for the
step, analog and manual sweep frequency modes.
There are several ways you can select a sweep
range, including:
q
Editing the current start and stop frequency
parameter values
q
Entering new start and stop frequency parameter values
q
Selecting one of the preset sweep range parameters (F1-F2, F3-F4, F5-dF, or F6-dF)
3-33
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Editing the Current Start / Stop Frequencies
To edit the current frequency sweep range, open either the start or stop frequency parameter. In the
display above, Edit F1 [F1] opens the start frequency parameter; Edit F2 [F2] opens the stop frequency parameter.
Edit the open frequency parameter using the cursor
control keys or the rotary data knob. When you are
finished, close the open parameter by pressing its
menu edit soft-key or by making another menu selection.
Entering New Start / Stop Frequencies
To enter a new frequency sweep range, open either
the start or stop frequency parameter (press Edit F1
[F1] or Edit F2 [F2]).
Enter a new frequency using the keypad and appropriate termination soft-key. When you are finished,
close the open parameter by pressing its menu edit
soft-key or by making another menu selection.
Selecting a Preset Sweep Range
There are four preset sweep range parameters, selectable in the analog sweep, step sweep, and manual sweep frequency modes. The following is a
description of each preset sweep range.
q
F1-F2 [SF1] –provides a frequency sweep between the start frequency, F1, and the stop frequency, F2
q
F3-F4 [SF3]–provides a frequency sweep between the start frequency, F3, and the stop frequency, F4
q
F5-dF [DF5]–provides a symmetrical frequency
sweep about the center frequency, F5. The
sweep width is determined by the dF frequency
parameter
q
F6-dF [DF6]–provides a symmetrical frequency
sweep about the center frequency, F6. The
sweep width is determined by the dF frequency
parameter
RANGE
This error message is displayed
when the dF value entered results
in a sweep outside the range of the
MG369XB. Entering a valid value
will clear the error.
3-34
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Sweep Frequency Operation
To select one of the preset sweep ranges from any
sweep frequency mode menu, press the soft-key
Frequency Control > . The Sweep Frequency Control
menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Select a full range sweep (Fmin to Fmax) [FUL]
or one of the preset sweep ranges for the sweep
frequency mode
q
Select the frequency parameters for each preset sweep range
q
Access the marker list menu (described on
page 3-36)
q
Select an output power level for the sweep
Setting a Preset Sweep Range
At the Sweep Frequency Control menu, select the
sweep range (F1-F2, F3-F4, F5-dF, or F6-dF) that you
wish to set. The menu then displays the current frequency parameters for the selected sweep range.
Now, use the menu edit soft-keys to open the frequency parameters for editing.
Edit the current frequency parameters or enter new
frequency parameter values for the sweep range. To
close the open frequency parameter when you are
finished, press its menu edit soft-key or make another menu selection.
You can set all the preset sweep ranges in this manner.
MG369XB OM
3-35
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Selecting a
Power Level
While at the Sweep Frequency Control menu, you
can edit the current output power level or enter a
new output power level for the frequency sweep.
Editing the Current Power Level
Press Edit L1 [XL1] to open the power level parameter, then edit the current power level using the cursor control keys or rotary data knob. To close the
open power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make
another menu selection.
Entering a New Power Level
Press Edit L1 [XL1] to open the power level parameter, then enter the new power level using the keypad
and appropriate termination soft-key. To close the
open power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make
another menu selection.
NOTE
You can also select any of the preset power levels for a frequency sweep or a power level step
for a step sweep. For instructions, refer to
page 3-51 (Fixed Power Level Operation) and
page 3-56 (Power Level Sweep Operation).
Frequency
Markers
The signal generator provides up to 20 independent,
pre-settable markers, F0-F9 and M0-M9, that can be
used in the step sweep frequency mode for precise
frequency identification. Marker frequency accuracy
is the same as sweep frequency accuracy. The markers are visible on a CRT display.
The MG369XB generates two types of markers:
3-36
q
Video Marker–produces a pulse on a CRT
display at each marker frequency. The video
marker is either a +5V or a –5V pulse available at the rear panel AUX I/O connector. The
marker’s pulse polarity is selectable from the
System Configuration menu, page 3-78
q
Intensity Marker–produces an intensified
dot on a CRT display at each marker frequency. They are obtained by a momentary
dwell in the sweep at each marker frequency.
Intensity markers are only available in the analog sweep frequency mode at sweep times of
<1 second
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Sweep Frequency Operation
To output markers during a sweep you must first select (tag) the marker frequencies from the Marker
List menu, then turn on the marker output.
To access the Marker List menu from a sweep frequency menu, press Frequency Control > . The
Sweep Frequency Control menu (below) is displayed.
Now press the menu soft-key Marker List... . The
Marker List menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you tag or edit marker list frequencies and turn the markers on/off.
Use the cursor control keys to select a frequency parameter from the marker list. The selected frequency parameter is highlighted in reverse video
and displayed in full below the marker list.
Editing a Marker List Frequency
If you want to change a selected marker list frequency parameter's value, press Edit Selected to
open the frequency parameter, then edit the current
frequency or enter a new frequency.
MG369XB OM
3-37
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Tagging a Marker List Frequency
Only frequencies on the marker list that have been
tagged can be output as markers during a sweep.
Press Tag to tag a selected frequency parameter
(place an m in front of it). If a frequency parameter
is already tagged, pressing Tag will un-tag the frequency parameter (remove the m).
Activating Markers
Press Video Markers [VM1] to output the tagged
marker frequencies as video markers during a step
sweep. Video markers will be displayed on the CRT
for all tagged marker frequencies that are within
the sweep frequency range.
To turn the markers off, press Video Markers [MK0]
again.
Press < Previous to return to the Sweep Frequency
Control menu display.
Selecting
Alternate
Sweep Mode
In alternate sweep frequency mode, the signal generator's output frequency sweeps alternately between any two sweep ranges in step sweep.
NOTE
The following procedure applies for both step
sweep mode and analog sweep mode.
To select the alternate sweep mode from the Step
Sweep menu display, press More > to access the Additional Step Sweep menu display (below).
3-38
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Sweep Frequency Operation
From here or from the Analog Sweep menu, press
Alternate Sweep > to access the Alternate Sweep
menu display (below).
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Turn the alternate sweep mode on/off
q
Access the alternate range menu to select a
sweep range for the alternate sweep
q
Access the alternate level menu to select a
power level for the alternate sweep
Activating the Alternate Sweep
The soft-key Alternate Sweep toggles the alternate
sweep mode on and off.
Press Alternate Sweep to turn on the alternate
sweep mode. Notice that the Alternate Sweep menu
(below) changes to show that the alternate sweep is
now active.
MG369XB OM
3-39
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Selecting an Alternate Sweep Range
Press Alternate Range > to access the Alternate
Range menu display (below).
Select the alternate sweep range (Full [AFU], F1-F2
[AF1], F3-F4 [AF3], F5-dF [AD5], or F6-dF [AD6]). The
menu then displays the current frequency parameters for the selected sweep range. If you wish to
change a frequency parameter, use the menu edit
soft-key to open the parameter, then edit it.
When you are done selecting the alternate sweep
range, press < Previous to return to the Alternate
Sweep menu display.
3-40
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Sweep Frequency Operation
Selecting an Alternate Sweep Power Level
Press Alternate Level > to access the Alternate
Level menu display (below).
Select the power level for the alternate sweep range
(L0 [AL0], L1 [AL1], L2 [AL2], L3 [AL3], or L4 [AL4]).
The menu then displays the current level parameter
for the selected power level. If you wish to change
the level, press Edit L2 to open the parameter, then
edit it.
The Edit L1 soft-key is provided to let you change
the power level of the main sweep.
When you are done selecting the power level for the
alternate sweep range and editing the power level of
the main sweep, press < Previous to return to the
Alternate Sweep menu display.
CAUTION
Performing alternate sweeps using power levels that cross
step attenuator switch points can cause excessive wear on
the switches and reduce the life expectancy of the step
attenuator.
MG369XB OM
3-41
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
List Sweep
Mode
In list sweep frequency mode, the output is a step
sweep of up to 2000 phase-locked, non-sequential
frequencies. Each frequency can have a different
power level setting. The list index (0 through 1999)
identifies each frequency/power level set in the list.
The list sweep is defined by a list start index and
list stop index.
There are four modes of sweep triggering in list
sweep—automatic, external, single, and manual.
When automatic, external, or single trigger mode is
selected, the output sweeps between the specified
list start and stop indexes, dwelling at each list index for the specified dwell time. When manual trigger mode is selected, the list start index, list stop
index, and dwell time parameter are not used. Instead, the list index is incremented or decremented
by using the front panel cursor control keys. In manual trigger mode, the list index can also be incremented by using an external trigger input. Each
TTL trigger increments the list index by one.
After a reset, the list sweep defaults to manual trigger mode. The data display shows the trigger mode,
list index, current frequency, and current power
level. The list index specifies the current location
within the list. The current frequency is preceded by
the text “Fr”. The current power level is preceded by
the text “Lv”. When automatic, external, or single
trigger mode is selected, the data display changes to
show the trigger mode and list sweep start and stop
index values only.
The list of up to 2000 frequency/power level sets is
stored in non-volatile RAM to preserve any settings
after the instrument is powered off. The list is not
stored with the other setup information in the instrument. After a master reset, the list is reset to its
default state of 2000 index entries of 5 GHz at
0 dBm.
3-42
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Selecting List
Sweep Mode
Sweep Frequency Operation
To place the MG369XB in list sweep frequency
mode, press Frequency . At the resulting menu display, press List [LST]. The List Sweep menu (below)
is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Access the Frequency List menu (edit list index frequency parameters and insert and delete list index entries)
q
Access the Power List menu (edit list index
power level parameters and insert and delete
list index entries)
q
Edit the list index parameter
q
Calculate all list index frequency and power
level settings
q
Access the Sweep menu (set sweep start index,
stop index, and dwell time and select a sweep
trigger)
q
Edit the current list index frequency, Fr
Editing the List Index
Press Edit List Index [ELI(xxxx)] to open the list index parameter for editing. Edit the current list index value using the cursor control keys, rotary data
knob, or enter a new value using the key pad and
termination soft-key. When you have finished setting the open parameter, close it by pressing
Edit List Index again or by making another menu
selection.
MG369XB OM
3-43
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
The Edit List Index soft-key is not the only way to
change the list index. In the list sweep mode with
manual trigger selected, each time the Ù or Ú cursor
control key is pressed the list index increments or
decrements by one. The Edit List Index soft-key is
used if a larger change in the list index is desired.
The only time the cursor control keys will not
change the list index is when a different parameter,
such as frequency, power level, etc., is open.
The cursor control keys will then change the value
of the open parameter. Once the open parameter is
closed, the cursor control keys will again change the
list index.
Performing List Calculations
The Pre-Calc List soft-key [LEA] initiates a process
that examines every index in the list and performs
all the calculations necessary to set the frequency
and power levels. The soft-key does not have to be
pressed every time the list changes. The instrument
will perform the calculations to set the frequency
and power levels as it performs the initial list
sweep. This causes the initial list sweep to take longer than each subsequent sweep. Using the
Pre-Calc List soft-key lets the initial list sweep be
as fast as each subsequent sweep. The calculations
are stored in volatile RAM and are lost at instrument power-off.
Press Pre-Calc List to perform list calculations. The
soft-key image depresses to show that calculations
are in progress. When the calculations are completed, the soft-key returns to normal appearance.
Editing the Current List Index Frequency
Press Edit Fr to open the current list index frequency parameter for editing. Edit the current frequency using the cursor control keys, rotary data
knob, or enter a new value using the key pad and
termination soft-key. When you have finished setting the open parameter, close it by pressing
Edit Fr again or by making another menu selection.
3-44
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Sweep Frequency Operation
List Frequency List frequency editing consists of editing the list index frequency parameters and inserting and deletEditing
ing list index entries.
At the List Sweep menu, press Frequency List... .
The List Frequency Edit menu is displayed (following page).
This menu lets you scroll through the list frequencies, edit selected frequencies, insert and delete entries from the list.
The menu displays a total of 20 frequencies. The index range of the displayed frequencies is shown at
the top of the list. Use the cursor control keys to select a frequency from the list. The selected frequency is highlighted in reverse video and displayed
in full below the frequency list.
Press Edit Selected to edit the highlighted frequency or enter a new frequency.
Press Page Up to scroll the displayed frequencies
to the previous 20 in the list. Press Page Down to
scroll the displayed frequencies to the next 20 in the
list.
Press Insert at Index to insert the default frequency
(5 GHz) at the current list index.
NOTE
Because the list size is fixed, inserting a new index will cause the last index to be lost. The frequency and power level at list index 1999 will be
deleted and cannot be recovered.
MG369XB OM
3-45
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Press Delete at Index to delete the current list index.
NOTE
Deleting an entry cannot be undone. Once a list
index is deleted, the only recovery is to re-enter
the deleted frequency and power level.
Press < Previous to return to the List Sweep menu
display.
List Power
Editing
List power editing consists of editing the list index
power level parameters and inserting and deleting
list index entries.
At the List Sweep menu, press Power List... . The
List Power Edit menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you scroll through the list power levels, edit selected power levels, insert and delete entries from the list.
The menu displays a total of 10 power levels. Use
the cursor control keys to select a power level from
the list. The selected power level is highlighted in
reverse video and displayed in full below the power
level list.
Press Edit Selected to edit the highlighted power
level or enter a new power level.
Press Page Up to scroll the displayed power levels
to the previous 10 in the list. Press Page Down to
scroll the displayed power levels to the next 10 in
the list.
3-46
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Sweep Frequency Operation
Press Insert at Index to insert the default power
level (0 dBm) at the current list index.
NOTE
Because the list size is fixed, inserting a new index will cause the last index to be lost. The frequency and power level at list index 1999 will be
deleted and cannot be recovered.
Press Delete at Index to delete the current list index.
NOTE
Delete entry cannot be undone. Once a list index is deleted, the only recovery is to re-enter
the deleted frequency and power level.
Press < Previous to return to the List Sweep menu
display.
Copying Data from the CW Menu
An easy method of entering frequency and power
level information into the current list index is to
copy the data from the CW menu.
First, access the main List Sweep menu and press
the Edit List Index soft-key to open the list index parameter. Then, select the list index that you want
the data to be added to.
Next, press the CW soft-key at the bottom of the
display. The CW menu (below) is displayed.
Use the Edit F1 and Edit L1 soft-keys to set the
frequency and power level to the values you wish to
enter into the current list index.
Press the Copy to List soft-key to copy the data to
the current list index.
MG369XB OM
3-47
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Once the frequency and power level information has
been entered into the current list index, the list index is incremented by one.
Selecting a
List Sweep
Range
Selecting a sweep range involves choosing a start index and a stop index for the list sweep.
To access the Sweep menu (below) from the main
List Sweep menu, press Sweep > .
This menu lets you select a list sweep range, set
dwell-time-per-step, and access the trigger menu.
Press Start Index [LIB(xxxx)] to open the list sweep
start index parameter.
Press Stop Index [LIE(xxxx)] to open the list sweep
stop index parameter.
Press Dwell Time [LDT] to open the
dwell-time-per-step parameter.
Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination soft-key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
menu selection.
To access the List Sweep Trigger menu from this
menu, press Trigger > . The trigger menu lets you
select a sweep trigger mode (described on the following page).
Press < Previous to return to the main List Sweep
menu display.
3-48
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Selecting a
List Sweep
Trigger
Sweep Frequency Operation
There are four modes of sweep triggering in list
sweep frequency mode, each selectable from the trigger menu. The following is a description of each
mode.
q
Auto (Automatic)—The output sweeps
between the specified list start and stop
indexes, dwelling at each list index for the
specified dwell time
q
External—The output sweep recurs when
triggered by an external TTL-compatible clock
pulse to the rear panel AUX I/O connector
q
Single (Trig)—A single output sweep starts
when the trigger key is pressed. If a sweep is
in progress when the key is pressed, it aborts
and resets
q
Manual—(list sweep default trigger mode) The
list index is incremented or decremented by
using the front panel cursor control keys. The
list index can also be incremented using an external trigger input. Each trigger increments
the list index by one
To access the List Sweep Trigger menu (below) from
the Sweep menu, press Trigger > .
To select a sweep trigger mode, press its menu
soft-key.
MG369XB OM
q
Press Auto [AUT] to select automatic triggering
q
Press External [HWT] to select external triggering
q
Press Single [EXT] to select single sweep triggering
q
Press Manual [MNT] to select manual triggering
3-49
Sweep Frequency Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
A message showing the sweep trigger mode selected
appears on the right side of frequency title bar.
If you select the single sweep trigger mode, the
menu display adds the menu soft-key Trigger .
Pressing Trigger [TRG] starts a single sweep. If a
single sweep is in progress, pressing
Trigger [RSS] causes the sweep to abort and reset.
Press < Previous to return to the Sweep menu display.
NOTE
With Auto trigger selected and the dwell-timeper-step set to a small value, display updating
slows down. This ensures that the sweep speed
is not adversely affected. Because of this potential display update slow down, when leaving
List Sweep mode with Auto trigger selected for
another mode, Auto trigger is automatically
turned off and Manual trigger is selected. Thus,
when List Sweep mode is entered, the display
updating will be back to normal speed.
3-50
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
3-9
Fixed Power Level
Operation
Fixed Power Level Operation
The MG3692B provides main band leveled output power over a maximum range of up to 32 dB (up to 135 dB with Option 2) for CW and
sweep frequency operations. Instruments with Option 15 provide leveled output power over a maximum range of up to 24 dB (up to 133 dB
with Option 2). The following paragraphs describe how to place the
signal generator in fixed (non-swept) power level mode, select a power
level for output, select logarithmic or linear units, and activate level
offset. Use the Fixed (Non-Swept) Power Level Mode menu map
(Chapter 4, Figure 4-7) to follow the menu sequences.
Selecting
Fixed Power
Level Mode
To place the MG369XB in a fixed power level mode
from a CW or sweep frequency menu, press Level .
At the resulting menu display, press Level . The
Level menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
Selecting a
Power Level
q
Edit the power level parameter
q
Set the power level to 1 dB below specified
maximum leveled output power (CW only)
q
Edit the level offset parameter
q
Turn level offset on/off
There are several ways to select a power level for
output. You can edit the current power level, enter a
new power level, or select one of the 10 preset power
level parameters.
Editing the Current Power Level
Press Edit L1 [XL1] to open the power level parameter, then edit the current power level using the cursor control keys or the rotary data knob. To close the
open power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make
another menu selection.
MG369XB OM
3-51
Fixed Power Level Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Entering a New Power Level
Press Edit L1 [XL1] to open the power level parameter, then enter the new power level using the keypad
and appropriate termination soft-key.
To close the open power level parameter, press
Edit L1 or make another menu selection.
Selecting a Preset Power Level
To select one of the preset power levels for output,
press Level Control > . The Level Control menu
(below) is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Select one of the preset power levels L0 [L0], L1
[L1], L2 [L2], L3 [L3], or L4 [L4] for output
q
Edit each preset power level
q
Access the Level List menu (to tag, edit, or output a power level from the list)
q
Select a tagged power level from the Level List
for output using the Scan Up or Scan Down
keys
q
Select Logarithmic or Linear units
Press Units> [LOG/LIN] to display the Units menu
(left) and to select the power level units. When Log
is selected, units are dBm or dBmV; when Linear is
selected, units are mV. The units are displayed with
the indicated power level to reflect your selection.
Press < Previous to return to the Level menu display.
3-52
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Fixed Power Level Operation
Level List
To access the Level List menu (below), press Level
List... . This menu lets you select a power level from
the list to tag, edit, or output.
Use the cursor control keys to select a power level
from the level list. The selected power level is highlighted in reverse video and displayed in full below
the level list.
Press Tag Selected to tag the selected power level
(place an L in front of it). If a power level is already
tagged, pressing Tag Selected will un-tag the selected power level (remove the L). Tagging selected
power levels lets you quickly switch between them
using the scan soft-keys of the Level Control menu.
Press Edit Selected to edit the selected power level
or enter a new power level.
Press Output Level to output the selected level. On
the level list, the output power level selection is
marked by a black square or, if tagged, an L highlighted in reverse video. This power level is output
until you select another level from the list and press
Output Level .
When you are finished , press < Previous to return
to the Level Control menu display.
MG369XB OM
3-53
Fixed Power Level Operation
Level Offset
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Level offset lets you compensate for a device on the
signal generator's output that alters the RF output
power level at the point of interest. For example, the
power level at the test device may be less or more
than the displayed power level because of the loss
through an external transmission line or the gain of
an amplifier located between the MG369XB RF output and the test device. Using the level offset function, you can apply a constant to the displayed
power level that compensates for this loss or gain.
The displayed power level will then reflect the actual power level at the test device.
To enter an offset value and apply it to the displayed
power level, access the Level menu. Then press
Edit Offset [LOS]. This opens the offset parameter
for editing (below).
Edit the current offset value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new offset
value using the keypad and appropriate termination
soft-key. To close the open offset parameter when
you are done, press Edit Offset or make another
menu selection.
3-54
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Fixed Power Level Operation
Press Offset [LO1] to apply the offset to the displayed power level. In this example, a+2.00 dB offset
is applied to L1. L1 then displays a power level of
+2.00 dBm.
When Offset is selected ON, the message OFFSET
is displayed on all menu displays to remind you that
a constant offset has been applied to the displayed
power level.
Press Offset [LO0] again to remove the offset from
the displayed power level.
MG369XB OM
3-55
Power Level Sweep Operation
3-10
Power Level Sweep
Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
The signal generator provides leveled output power sweeps at CW frequencies and in conjunction with frequency sweeps. Power level
sweeps can be from a high level to a low level or vice versa. Power
level sweeps can be selected to be linear or logarithmic. The following
paragraphs provide descriptions and operating instructions for the
CW power sweep mode and the sweep frequency/step power modes.
Use the CW Power Sweep Mode and Sweep Frequency/Step Power
Mode menu maps (Chapter 4, Figures 4-8 and 4-9) to follow the menu
sequences.
CAUTION
Performing power level sweeps that cross step attenuator
switch points can cause excessive wear on the switches and
reduce the life expectancy of the step attenuator.
Selecting CW
Power Sweep
Mode
In the CW power sweep mode, output power steps
between any two power levels at a single CW frequency. Available menus let you set or select the
sweep range, the step size, the dwell time-per-step,
and the type of power sweep (linear or logarithmic)
and sweep trigger.
To place the MG369XB in a CW power sweep mode
from a CW frequency menu, press Level . At the resulting menu display, press Level Sweep . The CW
Level Sweep menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
3-56
q
Select a power level sweep range (edit the
sweep start and stop power level parameters)
q
Set the dwell time-per-step
q
Set the step size
q
Set the number of steps
q
Access the trigger menu (select a sweep trigger)
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Setting CW
Power Sweep
Step Size and
Dwell Time
Power Level Sweep Operation
There are two ways to set the size of each step of the
CW power sweep—set the step size or set the number of steps. The step size range is 0.01 dB (Log) or
0.001 mV (Linear) to the full power range of the signal generator; the number of steps range is 1 to
10,000. The dwell time-per-step of the CW power
sweep can be set for any time in the range of 1 ms to
99 sec. If the sweep crosses a step attenuator setting, there will be a sweep dwell of approximately
20 ms to allow setting of the step attenuator.
Press Dwell Time [PDT] to open the dwell time-perstep parameter.
RANGE
Press Step Size to open the step size parameter.
This error message is displayed
when (1) the step size value entered
is greater than the level sweep
range or (2) the number of steps entered results in a step size of less
than 0.01 dB (Log) or 0.001 mV
(Linear). Entering a valid step size
will clear the error.
Press Num of Steps [PNS] to open the number of
steps parameter.
Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination soft-key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
menu selection.
To access the CW Level Sweep Trigger menu from
this menu, press Trigger > .
Selecting a
CW Power
Sweep Trigger
MG369XB OM
There are three modes of triggering provided for the
CW power sweep—automatic, external, and single.
The sweep trigger is selectable from the CW Level
Sweep Trigger menu. The following is a description
of each trigger mode.
q
Auto (Automatic)–The CW power sweep
continually sweeps from its start power level to
its stop power level with optimal retrace time
q
External–The CW power sweep recurs when
triggered by an external TTL-compatible clock
pulse to the rear panel AUX I/O connector
q
Single–A single CW power sweep starts when
the trigger key is pressed. If a sweep is in
progress when the key is pressed, it aborts and
resets
3-57
Power Level Sweep Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
To access the CW Level Sweep Trigger menu from
the CW Level Sweep menu, press Trigger > .
To select a CW power sweep trigger mode, press its
menu soft-key.
q
Press Auto [AUT] to select automatic triggering
q
Press External [HWT] to select external triggering
q
Press Single [EXT] to select single sweep triggering
A message showing the CW power sweep trigger
mode selected appears on the right side of the level
mode title bar.
If you select the single sweep trigger mode, the
menu display adds the menu soft-key Trigger .
Pressing Trigger [TRG or TRS] starts a single CW
power sweep. If a single CW power sweep is in progress, pressing Trigger [RSS] causes the sweep to
abort and reset.
Press < Previous to return to the CW Level Sweep
menu display.
3-58
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Selecting a
Power Level
Sweep Range
Power Level Sweep Operation
Selecting a power level sweep range consists of
choosing a start and stop level for the power level
sweep. The power level sweep range selection process is identical for all power level sweep
modes—CW power sweep and sweep frequency/step
power. You can select a power level sweep range as
follows:
q
Edit the current start and stop power level parameter values
q
Enter new start and stop power level parameter values
q
Select one of the preset power level sweep
range parameters (L1-L2, L3-L4, L5-L6, L7-L8,
or L9-L0)
Editing the Current Start / Stop Power Levels
To edit the current power level sweep range, open either the start or stop power level parameter. In the
display above, Edit L1 [XL1] opens the start power
level parameter and Edit L2 [XL2] opens the stop
power level parameter.
Edit the open power level parameter using the cursor control keys or the rotary data knob. When you
are finished, close the open parameter by pressing
its menu edit soft-key or by making another menu
selection.
Entering New Start / Stop Power Levels
To enter a new power level sweep range start by
opening either the start or stop power level parameters (press Edit L1 [XL1] or Edit L2 [XL2] ).
Enter a new power level using the keypad and appropriate terminator soft-key. When you are finished, close the open parameter by pressing its
menu edit soft-key or by making another menu selection.
MG369XB OM
3-59
Power Level Sweep Operation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Selecting a Preset Power Level Sweep Range
There are five preset power level sweep range parameters selectable in the power level sweep modes.
These preset power level sweep range parameters
are L1-L2, L3-L4, L5-L6, L7-L8, and L9-L0.
To select one of the preset power level sweep ranges
from a Level Sweep menu, press the Level Control >
soft-key. The Level Sweep Control menu (below) is
displayed.
In addition to letting you select one of the preset
sweep ranges for the power level sweep, this menu
lets you select logarithmic or linear power level
sweep and set the start and stop power level parameters for each selected preset sweep range.
Setting a Preset Power Level Sweep Range
At the Level Sweep Control menu, select the power
level sweep range (L1-L2, L3-L4, L5-L6, L7-L8, or
L9-L0) that you wish to set. The menu then displays
the current frequency parameters for the selected
power level sweep range. Now, use the menu edit
soft-keys to open the power level parameters for editing.
Edit the current power level parameter values or
enter new power level parameter values for the
power level sweep range. To close the open power
level parameter when you are finished, press its
menu edit soft-key or make another menu selection.
Selecting Type of Power Level Sweep
Press Units> [LOG/LIN] to display the Units menu
(left) and to select the power level units. When Log
is selected, units are dBm or dBmV; when Linear is
selected, units are mV. The units are displayed with
the indicated power level to reflect your selection
3-60
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Selecting a
Sweep
Frequency/Step
Power Mode
Power Level Sweep Operation
In analog sweep frequency/step power mode or step
sweep frequency/step power mode, a power level
step occurs after each frequency sweep. The power
level remains constant for the length of time required to complete each frequency sweep. Available
menus let you control the type of power level sweep
(linear or logarithmic), the power level sweep range,
and the step size.
To select an analog sweep frequency/step power
mode, start with an analog sweep menu display; to
select a step sweep frequency/step power mode, start
with a step sweep menu display. Then press
Level .
At the resulting menu display, press Level Sweep .
The Level Sweep menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Select a power level sweep range (edit the
sweep start and stop power level parameters)
q
Set the step size
q
Set the number of steps
q
Access the Level Sweep Trigger menu
NOTE
To select logarithmic or linear power level
sweep or to select a power level sweep range, refer to the procedures on pages 3-59 and 3-60.
MG369XB OM
3-61
Power Level Sweep Operation
Setting Power
Level Step
Size
Local (Front Panel) Operation
There are two ways to set the step size of the power
level step that occurs after each frequency
sweep—set the step size or set the number of steps.
The step size range is 0.01 dB (Log) or 0.001 mV
(Linear) to the full power range of the signal generator; the number of steps range is 1 to 10,000. The
power level step size is set from the Level Sweep
Ramp menu.
Press Step Size to open the step size parameter.
RANGE
This error message is displayed
when (1) the step size value entered
is greater than the level sweep
range or (2) the number of steps entered results in a step size of less
than 0.01 dB (Log) or 0.001 mV
(Linear). Entering a valid step size
will clear the error.
3-62
Press Num of Steps [PNS] to open the number of
steps parameter.
Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using the keypad and appropriate termination soft-key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
menu selection.
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
3-11
Leveling
Operations
Leveling Operations
The MG3692B provides main band leveled output power over a maximum range of up to 32 dB (up to 135 dB with Option 2) for CW and
sweep frequency operations. Instruments with Option 15 provide leveled output power over a maximum range of up to 24 dB (up to 133 dB
with Option 2). An automatic level control (ALC) system controls the
amplitude and power level of the RF output. You can select the ALC
mode of operation—internal, external (detector or power meter), or
fixed gain (ALC off). In addition, the signal generator provides a decouple function that allows decoupling of the step attenuator (if
equipped) from the ALC system and a user level (flatness correction)
calibration function that provides compensation for path-variations-with-frequency in a test setup.
The following paragraphs provide descriptions and operating instructions for the leveling modes and functions. Use the Leveling Modes
menu map (Chapter 4, Figure 4-10) to follow the menu sequences.
Selecting a
Leveling Mode
The ALC system is a feedback control system, in
which the output power is measured at a detector
and compared with the expected power level. If the
output and desired power levels do not equal, the
ALC adjusts the power output until they do. The
ALC feedback signal can come from either the internal detector or an external detector or power meter.
Alternatively, the output power can be set to a fixed
level without using the normal feedback (ALC off).
The ALC mode menu lets you select a leveling mode.
To access the ALC Mode menu, first press Level .
At the Level/ALC Select menu display, press
ALC Mode . The ALC Mode menu (below) is displayed.
MG369XB OM
3-63
Leveling Operations
Local (Front Panel) Operation
The ALC Mode menu lets you perform the following:
q
Access the Leveling menu (select the ALC
mode of operation)
q
Access the Attenuation menu (decouple the attenuator, if equipped, from the ALC system
and set the power level and attenuation)
To access the Leveling menu from the ALC Mode
menu, press Leveling > . The Leveling menu (below)
is displayed.
Internal Leveling
This is the normal (default) leveling mode. Output
power is sensed by the MG369XB’s internal detector.
The detector output signal is fed back to the ALC
circuitry to adjust the output power level. Internal
ALC is selected from the leveling menu.
To select internal ALC, press Internal [IL1].
Pressing one of the other leveling menu soft-keys
External Detector [DL1], Power Meter [PL1], or
Fixed Gain [LV0] will turn off internal leveling.
Press < Previous to return to the ALC Mode menu.
3-64
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Leveling Operations
External Leveling
In external leveling, the output power from the
MG369XB is detected by an external detector or
power meter. The signal from the detector or power
meter is returned to the ALC circuitry via the rear
panel EXT ALC IN connector. The ALC adjusts the
output power to keep the power level constant at the
point of detection. The external ALC source input is
selected from the leveling menu.
To select the external ALC input from an external
detector, press External Detector [DL1].
To select the external ALC input from a power meter, press Power Meter [PL1].
After the sensor type is selected, the attenuator (if
installed) is decoupled and the RF Level DAC value
is displayed as shown below:
The level indicator will also show the unleveled condition. The RF Level DAC adjustable range is from 0
to 16383.
Press < Previous to return to the ALC Mode menu
display or press Internal to return to normal ALC
operation.
MG369XB OM
3-65
Leveling Operations
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Fixed Gain
In the fixed gain mode, the ALC is disabled. The RF
Level DAC and step attenuator (if installed) are
used to control the relative power level. Power is not
detected at any point, and the absolute power level
is uncalibrated. Fixed gain mode is selected from the
leveling menu.
To select fixed gain mode, access the Leveling menu,
then press Fixed Gain [LV0]. After fixed gain mode
selected, the attenuator (if installed) is decoupled
and the RF Level DAC value is displayed as shown
below:
The level indicator will also show the unleveled condition. The RF Level DAC adjustable range is from 0
to 16383.
Press < Previous to return to the ALC Mode menu
display or press Internal to return to normal ALC
operation.
Auto Fixed Gain
In auto fixed gain mode, the ALC is enabled for the
initial power sweep, frequency sweep, or CW
frequency setting to obtain a sample of the RF Level
DAC voltages. After the DAC voltages are sampled,
the ALC is disabled and the sampled RF Level DAC
voltages are applied for all subsequent operation. If
a frequency or level parameter is changed, the ALC
will again sample the RF Level DAC voltages and
apply them to the new settings.
To select auto fixed gain mode, access the Leveling
menu, then press Auto Fixed Gain [LV1].
Press < Previous to return to the ALC Mode menu
display or press Internal to return to normal ALC
operation.
3-66
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Attenuator
Decoupling
Leveling Operations
In MG369XBs equipped with Option 2 step
attenuators, the ALC and attenuator work in conjunction to provide leveled output power down to
–140 dBm. In the normal (coupled) leveling mode,
when the desired power level is set, the correct combination of ALC level and attenuator setting is determined by the instrument firmware. In some
applications, such as receiver sensitivity testing, it
is desirable to control the ALC level and attenuator
setting separately by decoupling the step attenuator
from the ALC. The ALC mode menu lets you select
attenuator decoupling.
At the ALC Mode menu, press Attenuation > . The
Attenuation menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you decouple the step attenuator
from the ALC, set the power level, and set the attenuation in 10 dB steps.
NOTE
The set power level may not be
maintained when switching between attenuator coupling modes.
Press Decouple [AT1] to decouple the step attenuator from the ALC.
Press Edit L1 [XL1] to open the power level parameter for editing. Edit the current level using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new
value using the key pad and appropriate termination soft-key. When you have finished setting the
power level, press Edit L1 to close the open parameter or make another menu selection.
When decoupled, pressing Increase Attenuation
[ATT(xx)] or Decrease Attenuation [ATT(xx)] changes
the attenuation in 10 dB steps.
Press Decouple again [AT0] to recouple the step
attenuator.
Press < Previous to return to the ALC Mode menu.
MG369XB OM
3-67
Leveling Operations
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Power Level
ALC Power
Slope
The ALC power slope function lets you compensate
for system, cable, and waveguide variations due to
changes in frequency. This is accomplished by linearly increasing or decreasing power output as the
frequency increases. As shown in the following illustration, the power slope function provides you with
the ability to set both the power slope and the pivot
point. The ALC loop menu lets you activate the ALC
power slope function.
Power
Slope
Power Slope
Pivot Point
Power at DUT
With Compensation
Power at DUT
Without Compensation
Frequency
To access the ALC Loop menu from the Level ALC
Control menu display, press ALC Loop . The ALC
Loop menu (below) is displayed.
3-68
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Leveling Operations
Press Slope On/Off [SL1] to activate the ALC power
slope function.
SLOPE
When Power Slope is selected ON,
this status message is displayed on
all menu displays to remind you
that a power slope correction has
been applied to the ALC.
Press Edit Pivot [PVT] to open the pivot point frequency parameter for editing. Edit the current frequency using the cursor control keys, rotary data
knob, or enter a new value using the keypad and appropriate termination key. When you have finished
setting the open parameter, close it by pressing
Edit Pivot or by making another menu selection.
Press Edit Slope [SLP] to open the slope parameter
for editing. Edit the current slope value using the
cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new
value using the key pad. When you have finished
setting the open parameter, close it by pressing
Edit Slope or by making another menu selection.
While monitoring the power level at the device-under-test (DUT), adjust the power slope and pivot
point to level the power at the DUT.
Press Slope On/Off [SL0] again to deactivate the
ALC power slope function.
MG369XB OM
3-69
Leveling Operations
Local (Front Panel) Operation
User Cal
(User Power
Level Flatness
Calibration)
The User Cal (user power level flatness calibration)
function lets you compensate for path variations
with frequency that are caused by external switching, amplifiers, couplers, mixers, multipliers, dividers, and cables in the test setup. This is done by
means of an entered power-offset table from a GPIB
power meter or calculated data. When user level
flatness calibration is activated, the set power level
is delivered at the point in the test setup where the
calibration was performed. This “flattening” of the
test point power level is accomplished by summing a
power-offset word (from the power-offset table) with
the signal generator's normal power level DAC word
at each frequency point.
Up to five user level flatness calibration power-offset tables from 2 to 801 frequency points-per-table
can be created and stored in the MG369XB memory
for recall. The GPIB power meters supported are the
Anritsu Models ML2437A, ML2438A, and ML4803A
and the Hewlett-Packard Models 437B, 438A, and
70100A. The MG369XB’s internal power meter, provided with Option 8, may also be used. Refer to Section 3-17 on page 3-116 for information on using the
internal power meter.
G P IB
M G 3 6 9 X B S ig n a l G e n e r a to r
R F O u tp u t
R F In p u t
G P IB
S w itc h M a tr ix ,
A m p lifie r s ,
C o u p le r s , e tc .
D e v ic e
U n d e r
T e s t
Figure 3-4.
3-70
P o w e r
M e te r
F la tn e s s
C o rre c te d
O u tp u t
P o w e r
S e n s o r
Setup for Creating a Power-Offset Table (User Level Flatness Calibration)
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Leveling Operations
Equipment Setup
To create a power-offset table for user level flatness
calibration, connect the equipment (shown in
Figure 3-4) as follows:
Step 1.
Using a GPIB cable, connect the power
meter to the MG369XB.
Step 2.
Calibrate the power meter the power
sensor.
Step 3.
Connect the power sensor to the point in
the test setup where the corrected power
level is desired.
Power Meter Model and GPIB Address
In order for the MG369XB to control the power meter, the GPIB address and power meter model must
be selected from the Configure GPIB menu.
Press System to access the System menu display.
At the System menu display, press Config . The System Configuration menu (below) is displayed.
Next, press GPIB > . The Configure GPIB menu
(below) is displayed.
MG369XB OM
3-71
Leveling Operations
Local (Front Panel) Operation
At the Configure GPIB menu, press More > to access the Additional Configure GPIB menu (below).
Press Power Mtr Address to change the address of
the power meter on the GPIB (the power meter's default address is 13). Enter the new address, between
1 and 30, using the cursor control keys or the data
entry key pad. The new GPIB address will appear
on the display.
Press Power Mtr Select to select one of the following
power meters:
q
Anritsu ML2430A or ML4803
q
Internal (Option 8)
q
Hewlett-Packard 437, 438, or 70100A
Press < Previous to return to the main Configure
GPIB menu display.
At the Configure GPIB menu, press < Previous to
return to the System Configuration menu display.
Creating a Power-Offset Table
The MG369XB must be in CW frequency mode and
fixed (non-swept) power level mode in order to create a power-offset table for user level flatness correction.
Place the signal generator in CW frequency mode by
pressing Frequency . At the resulting menu display,
press CW . The MG369XB is now in CW frequency
mode.
Place the signal generator in a fixed power level
mode by pressing Level . At the resulting menu display, press Level . The MG369XB is now in fixed
(non-swept) power level mode.
3-72
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Leveling Operations
At the Level menu, press User Lvl Cal . The User
Level Cal menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Select a measurement frequency range (edit
the start and stop frequency parameters)
q
Select the number of points at which correction
information is to be taken
q
Apply a power-offset table to the test setup
q
Create a power-offset table
q
Access the frequency scaling and offset menus
First, press the menu soft-key to select the
power-offset table (User 1, User 2, User 3, User 4, or
User 5) that you wish to create.
Next, set the measurement frequency range by
pressing Edit Start or Edit Stop to open the start
(Flo) or stop (Fhi) frequency parameter for editing.
Edit the current frequency using the cursor control
keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using
the keypad and appropriate termination soft-key.
When you have finished setting the open parameter,
close it by pressing its menu soft-key or by making
another menu selection.
Then, select the number of frequency points at
which correction information is to be taken by pressing Edit Points to open the number-of-points parameter for editing. Edit the current number-of- points
using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or
enter a new value using the keypad and the termination soft-key. (The number-of-points range is 2 to
801.) When you have finished setting the open number-of-points parameter, close it by pressing
Edit Points or by making another menu selection.
MG369XB OM
3-73
Leveling Operations
Local (Front Panel) Operation
If any frequency scaling or offset appears at the leveling point, press More > to access the power meter
frequency scaling and offset menu below.
Then press PM Freq Scale or PM Freq Offset and
edit the frequency scaling or offset value using the
cursor, keypad, or rotary knob. The scaling factor
range is - 10 to + 10 and the offset frequency range
is -150 to +150 GHz. Press < Previous to return to
the user level cal menu.
Now, press Start Calibration to begin automatically
taking power level correction information at each
frequency point. During this process the menu displays the status: Calibrating along with the current
measurement frequency point.
NOTE
To terminate the measurement process at any
time before completion, press Abort .
Once the power-offset table has been created, it is
stored in non-volatile memory. The power-offset table is now ready to be applied to the test setup. Disconnect the powers sensor and power meter from
the test setup.
Applying User Level Flatness Correction
Whenever user level flatness correction is applied to
the test setup by activating the power-offset table,
the set power level is delivered at the point where
the calibration was performed.
To activate the selected power-offset table and apply
user level flatness correction to the test setup, press
On/Off [LU1...5]. The User Level Cal menu will display: Status—On.
3-74
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Leveling Operations
When a power-offset table is selected ON, the message USER 1...5 is displayed on all menu displays
to remind you that a user level flatness correction
has been applied to the ALC.
To turn off the selected power-offset table and remove user level flatness correction from the test
setup, press On/Off [LU0] again. The User Level
Cal menu will display: Status—Off.
Entering a Power-Offset Table via GPIB
User level flatness correction can be applied to the
test setup using a power-offset table created from
calculated data and entered via the GPIB. Refer to
the MG369XB GPIB Programming Manual
(P/N: 10370-10366) for information and instructions
on creating a power-offset table and entering it via
the GPIB.
Erasing the Power-Offset Tables from Memory
The power-offset tables are stored in non-volatile
memory. A master reset is required to erase the contents of the tables and reprogram them with default
data.
To perform a master reset, proceed as follows:
NOTE
T he m aster res et function
overwrites all information stored in
the non-volatile memory with default values. This includes the nine
stored front panel setups and the
table of 2000 frequency/power level
sets used for list sweep mode.
Step 1.
With the MG369XB in standby, press and
hold the RF OUTPUT ON/OFF key.
Step 2.
Press the LINE OPERATE/STANDBY key
to turn the instrument on.
Step 3.
When the first menu is displayed (after
the start-up display), release the RF OUTPUT ON/OFF key.
For instruments without a front panel, a master reset can be performed at power on by grounding
pin 21 of the rear panel AUX I/O connector.
The contents of non-volatile memory have now been
erased and reprogrammed with default data.
MG369XB OM
3-75
System Configuration
3-12
System
Configuration
Local (Front Panel) Operation
The system configuration function provides menus that let you set or
select instrument configuration items; for example, display contrast,
polarity of blanking and video marker outputs, RF on or off during retrace or between steps, frequency scaling, GPIB operating parameters,
external interface language, and increment sizes for frequency, power
level, and time parameters. Use the System Configuration menu map
(Chapter 4, Figure 4-15) to follow the menu sequences.
Accessing the
System
Configuration
Menu
To access the System Configuration menu, first
press System . At the System menu display, press
Config . The System Configuration menu (below) is
displayed.
This menu lets you access the following:
3-76
q
Front Panel Configuration Menu
q
Rear Panel Configuration Menu
q
RF Configuration Menu
q
GPIB Configuration Menu
q
Increment Configuration Menu
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Configuring
the Front
Panel
System Configuration
Configuring the front panel of the signal generator
involves adjusting the display contrast for ease of
viewing.
To access the Configure Front Panel menu from the
System Configuration menu, press Front Panel > .
The Configure Front Panel menu (below) is displayed.
Press Increase Contrast (repeatedly) to increase the
display contrast to the desired level.
Press Decrease Contrast (repeatedly) to decrease
the display contrast.
Press < Previous to return to the System Configuration menu display.
MG369XB OM
3-77
System Configuration
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Configuring
the Rear
Panel
Configuring the rear panel of the signal generator
consists of selecting the polarity of the retrace
blanking, band switch blanking, retrace penlift, and
video marker outputs.
To access the Configure Rear Panel menu from the
System Configuration menu, press Rear Panel > .
The Configure Rear Panel menu (below) is displayed.
Press Blanking +/– [BPP/BPN] to select a +5V or
–5V level for the retrace and band switch blanking
outputs. The retrace and band switch blanking signal outputs are both available at the rear panel
AUX I/O connector (retrace blanking at pin 6; band
switch blanking at pin 20). The display will reflect
your selection.
Press Marker +/– to select a +5V or –5V level for
the video marker output when video markers are selected ON. The video marker signal output is available at the rear panel AUX I/O connector pin 5. The
display will reflect your selection.
Press Penlift to select Normally Open (N/O) [PPO]
or Normally-Closed (N/C) [PPC] contacts on the internal penlift relay. The penlift relay output, available at pin 12 of the rear panel AUX I/O connector, is
used to lift a plotter pen at band switch points, at
filter switch points, and during sweep retrace. The
display will reflect your selection.
Press < Previous to return to the System Configuration menu display.
3-78
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Configuring
the RF
System Configuration
Configuring the RF of the MG369XB involves the
following:
q
Selecting RF on or off during retrace
q
Selecting RF on or off during frequency
switching in CW, step sweep, and list sweep
modes
q
Selecting whether a sweep triggered by a single or external trigger should rest at the top or
bottom of the sweep ramp
q
Selecting RF on or off at reset
q
Setting the reference multiplier value for frequency scaling
q
Selecting 40 dB or 0 dB of attenuation when
RF is switched off (units with a step attenuator, Option 2, installed)
To access the Configure RF menu (below) from the
System Configuration menu, press RF > .
Press Retrace RF to select RF on [RT1] or off [RT0]
during retrace. The display will reflect your selection.
Press Delta-F RF to select RF on [RC1] or off [RC0]
during frequency switching in CW, step sweep, and
list sweep modes. The display will reflect your selection.
Press Ramp Rest to select 0 or 10 for the ramp rest
point for sweeps that are triggered by a single trigger or external trigger. 0 indicates that the sweep
will rest at the bottom of the sweep ramp; 10 indicates that the sweep will rest at the top of the sweep
ramp. The display will reflect your selection.
Press Reset State to select RF on [RO0] or off [RO1]
at reset. The display will reflect your selection.
MG369XB OM
3-79
System Configuration
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Press More > to access the additional Configure RF
menu for more selections.
Additional Configure RF Menu
When you press More > , the Additional Configure
RF menu (below) is displayed.
Frequency Scaling
Lets you set a reference multiplier value and apply
it to all frequency parameters. The reference multiplier can be any value between 0.1 and 18.
Changing the multiplier value changes the entered
and displayed frequencies, but does not affect the
output of the signal generator. For example:
NOTE
Resetting the MG369XB sets the
frequency scaling reference multiplier value to 1.
Frequency scaling set to 4
CW frequency set to 20 GHz
MG369XB output is 5 GHz (20 GHz ¸ 4)
Press Frequency Scaling [FRS] to open the reference multiplier parameter, then edit the current
value using the cursor control keys, rotary data
knob, or enter a new value using the data entry key
pad and the terminator soft-key. To close the open
multiplier parameter, press Frequency Scaling or
make another menu selection.
NOTE
The Terminate RF Off selection is
only available in units with
Option 2 (Step Attenuator).
Press Terminate RF Off [TR1] to select 40 dB (minimum) of attenuation when RF is switched off in
units with a step attenuator (Option 2) installed.
This provides a better output source match. The display will reflect Yes to indicate the 40 dB of attenuation is applied. Press Terminate RF Off [TR0] again
to select 0 dB of attenuation when RF is switched
off. The display will reflect No to indicate 0 dB of attenuation is applied.
Press < Previous to return to the main Configure
RF menu display.
3-80
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Configuring
the GPIB
System Configuration
The GPIB configuration menus let you perform the
following:
q
Set the GPIB address and select the GPIB line
terminator for the signal generator
q
Select the model and set the GPIB address for
the power meter that is used to create a user
level flatness correction power-offset table
q
Select scalar mode of operation with a Wiltron
Model 562 or Anritsu Model 56100A Scalar
Network Analyzer
q
Select scalar mode of operation with a
Giga-tronics Model 8003, a Hewlett Packard
Model 8757D or a Hewlett Packard Model
8757E Scalar Network Analyzer (Only available in units with the Pulse Modulation option
installed)
To access the Configure GPIB menu from the System Configuration menu, press GPIB > . The Configure GPIB menu (below) is displayed.
Press GPIB Address [ADD] to change the address of
the MG369XB on the bus (the CW default GPIB address is five). Enter a new address, between one and
30, using the cursor control keys or the data entry
keypad and the terminator key. The new GPIB address will appear on the display.
Press GPIB Terminator to select a carriage return
(CR) or a carriage return and line feed (CR/LF) as
the GPIB data delimiter. Consult the GPIB controller's manual to determine which data delimiter is
required.
Press More > to access the First Additional Configure GPIB menu for more selections.
MG369XB OM
3-81
System Configuration
Local (Front Panel) Operation
First Additional Configure GPIB Menu
When you press More >, the First Additional Configure GPIB menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you select the model and set the
GPIB address for the power meter that is used to
create a user level flatness correction power-offset
table. (Refer to page 3-70 for a description of this
function.
Press Power Meter Address to change the address of
the power meter on the GPIB (the power meter's default GPIB address is 13). Enter a new address, between 1 and 30, using the cursor control keys or the
data entry keypad and the terminator soft-key. The
new GPIB address will appear on the display.
Press Power Meter Select to select the power meter
model being used. (Supported power meters are the
Anritsu ML2437A, ML2438A, and ML4803A and
Hewlett-Packard 437B, 438A, and 70100A.)
Press 68/69 ID to enable operations with a Wiltron
Model 562 or Anritsu Model 56100A Scalar Network
Analyzer. (Refer to page 7-4 for master-slave procedures.) Press 68/69 ID again to disable the operation.
NOTE
The Emulation > selection only appears on this menu display in units
with the Pulse Modulation option
installed.
Press Emulation > to access the Second Additional
Configure GPIB menu for more scalar mode of operation choices (described on the following page).
Press Display Updates to have the display updated
with the current instrument settings when in the
remote operation mode.
Press < Previous to return to the main Configure
GPIB menu display.
3-82
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
System Configuration
Second Additional Configure GPIB Menu
When you press Emulation > the Second Additional
GPIB menu (below) is displayed.
Press 8003 Scalar to enable operations with a
Giga-tronics Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer.
Press 8003 Scalar again to disable the operation.
Press 8757D Scalar to enable operations with a
Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer. Press 8757D Scalar again to disable the operation.
Press 8757E Scalar to enable operations with a
Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer. Press 8757E Scalar again to disable the operation.
Press < Previous to return to the First Additional
Configure GPIB menu display.
MG369XB OM
3-83
System Configuration
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Setting
Increment
Sizes
The Increment menu lets you set the incremental
size for editing frequency, power level, and time parameters. When the increment mode is selected on,
these parameter values will increase or decrease by
the set amount each time the Ù or Ú pad is pressed
or the rotary data knob is turned clockwise or counter-clockwise. The menu also lets you turn the increment mode on and off.
To access the Increment menu from the System
Configuration menu, press Increment > . The Increment menu (below) is displayed.
Press Frequency Increment to open the frequency
increment parameter.
Press Level Increment to open the power level increment parameter.
Press Time Increment to open the time increment
parameter.
Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
menu selection.
Press Increment Mode to turn the increment mode
on. Press Increment Mode again to turn it off.
Press < Previous to return to the System Configuration menu display.
3-84
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
3-13
Saving/Recalling
Instrument Setups
Saving/Recalling Instrument Setups
The MG369XB offers the capability to store up to ten complete front
panel setups. The setups are numbered zero through nine. The following paragraphs describe how to save and recall front panel setups.
Saving Setups
Once you have decided that an instrument setup
should be retained for future use, follow the procedure below to save the current setup:
Step 1.
Press System to display the System
menu.
Step 2.
Press Setups . The Setups menu (below)
is displayed.
Step 3.
Press Save [SSN(M1-9)], then enter the
desired setup number (between zero and
nine) on the keypad. The setup is now
saved.
NOTES
The current front panel settings are automatically saved to setup number zero when the instrument is shutdown using the front panel
LINE key. Therefore, it is recommended that you
only use setup numbers one through nine to
save front panel setups.
When an MG369XB shutdown occurs because
of main power interruptions, the current front
panel settings are not saved.
MG369XB OM
3-85
Saving/Recalling Instrument Setups
Recalling
Setups
Local (Front Panel) Operation
To recall a previously saved setup, first access the
Setups menu as described below:
Step 1.
Press System to display the System
menu.
Step 2.
Press Setups to display the Setups
menu.
Step 3.
At the Setups menu, press Recall
[RSN(M1-9)], then enter the setup number
on the keypad.
The MG369XB resets itself to the recalled configuration.
Erasing
Stored Setups
The front panel setups are stored in non-volatile
memory. A master reset is required to erase the contents of the setups and reprogram them with default
data.
To perform a master reset, proceed as follows:
NOTE
The master reset function overwrites all information stored in the
non-volatile memory with default
values. This includes the table of
2000 frequency/power level sets
used for the list sweep mode and
the five power-offset tables used for
the user level flatness correction
function.
Step 1.
With the MG369XB in standby mode,
press and hold the RF OUTPUT ON/OFF
key.
Step 2.
Press the LINE OPERATE/STANDBY key
to turn the instrument on.
Step 3.
When the first menu is displayed (after
the start-up display), release the RF OUTPUT ON/OFF key.
The contents of non-volatile memory have now been
erased and reprogrammed with factory default data.
A master reset can also be performed by sending the
GPIB command “MR” over the GPIB bus.
3-86
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
3-14
Secure Operation
Secure Operation
The MG369XB can be operated in a secure mode of operation. In this
secure mode, the display of all frequency and power level parameters
is disabled during both local (front panel) and remote (GPIB) operations. The instrument will continue to function normally in all other
respects. The following paragraphs describe how to place the signal
generator in secure mode and how to return to normal operation.
To place the MG369XB in the secure mode, first
press System to display the System menu.
Next, press Secure [DS0]. This places the signal
generator in the secure mode and the Secure menu
(below) is displayed.
NOTE
During secure mode, all main menu keys and
menu soft-keys operate normally. The menu
soft-key labels are displayed and change with
menu selections. Only the parameter display is
disabled.
To return the MG369XB to unsecured (normal) operation, press System , then press Reset .
Memory
Profile and
Security
Issues
The MG369XB has 8 MB of flash non-volatile memory, 128 KB of SRAM battery-backed non-volatile
memory, and 16 MB of DRAM volatile memory. It
does not have a hard drive or any other type of volatile or non-volatile memory.
Flash Memory
This memory space is used to store the instrument
firmware and factory calibration. No user information or user calibration is stored in flash memory.
Therefore, flash memory does not pose any security
issues for the user.
MG369XB OM
3-87
Reference Loop Adjustments
Local (Front Panel) Operation
SRAM Battery-backed Memory
This memory space is used to store user setups and
user calibrations. This memory may contain project
sensitive or secure information.
NOTE
When the MG369XB is removed from a secure
environment a master reset should be executed
to completely clear this memory and replace
factory default data. Master reset instructions
for the MG369XB are given on page 3-86.
3-15
Reference Loop
Adjustments
The signal source reference loop can be calibrated to an external reference source and the loop bandwidth can be adjusted to accommodate
various needs for an external reference input.
Reference
Oscillator
Calibration
The reference oscillator calibration function lets you
calibrate the internal 100 MHz crystal reference oscillator of the MG369XB using an external 10 MHz,
0 to +10 dBm reference signal.
NOTE
Before beginning calibration, always let the
MG369XB warm up for a minimum of 120
hours.
To perform a calibration of the internal reference oscillator, first connect the external 10 MHz reference
signal to the MG369XB rear panel 10 MHz REF IN
connector.
Next, press the System main menu key. At the
System menu display, press Cal > to access the Calibration menu (below).
Press Reference Calibration to begin calibration.
Press < Previous to return to the System menu display.
3-88
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Reference Loop Adjustments
When Reference Calibration is pressed, the Calibration Status menu is displayed (below).
Press Proceed to start the calibration.
Press Abort to cancel the calibration and return to
the Calibration menu display.
When Proceed is pressed, the date parameter
opens for data entry (below).
Using the key pad, enter the current date (in any
desired format). Then, press any terminator softkey. The Calibration Status menu display changes to
indicate calibration is in progress.
MG369XB OM
3-89
Reference Loop Adjustments
Local (Front Panel) Operation
When the reference calibration is complete, the Calibration menu is displayed.
External Reference Not Connected
If a calibration is attempted without an external
10 MHz reference signal connected to the rear panel
10 MHz REF IN connector, the instrument will beep
and the Calibration Status menu displays the following message:
No External Reference is connected!!!
No External Reference is Connected!!!
Reference
Loop
Bandwidth
The MG369XB provides a user selectable external
reference loop bandwidth. Bandwidths of 10 Hz,
30 Hz, 100 Hz, or 300 Hz can be selected from the
front panel system configuration menu. Selecting a
narrower bandwidth provides greater immunity
from reference related phase noise; however, reference tracking will not be optimal. Selecting a wider
bandwidth increases phase tracking of the external
reference; however, it also increases the susceptibility to reference noise.
To select an external reference loop bandwidth, first
connect the external 10 MHz reference signal to the
MG369XB rear panel 10 MHz REF IN connector.
3-90
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Reference Loop Adjustments
Next, press the System main menu key. At the
System menu display, press Config | Rear Panel >
to access the rear panel Configuration menu (below).
Press the External Ref BW > soft key to access the
bandwidth selections (below).
After selecting the external reference loop bandwidth, the setting is shown in the Configure Rear
Panel menu.
Press < Previous | < Previous to return to the System menu display.
NOTE
MG369XB phase noise specifications apply
only when an external reference is not connected.
MG369XB OM
3-91
Signal Modulation
3-16
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
The signal generator provides AM, FM, FM, and pulse modulation of
the output signal using modulating signals from either the internal
AM, FM, FM, and pulse generators or external sources that are
TTL-compatible. FM and FM are operationally exclusive; therefore,
only the AM, FM or FM, and pulse modulation modes can be active simultaneously. The following paragraphs provide descriptions and operating instructions for each modulation mode. Use the Amplitude
Modulation Mode, Frequency Modulation Mode, Phase Modulation
Mode, and Pulse Modulation Mode menu maps (Chapter 4, Figures 4-11 to 4-14) to follow the menu sequences.
NOTES
Your modulation capabilities are dependent on the instrument’s installed options. The following descriptions and procedures are presented to cover all of the possible instrument
configurations. Refer to your instrument’s rear panel for an
installed option list and to Appendix B—Performance Specifications for a current description of the available options.
Due to the complexity of remote programming the signal
modulation functions, GPIB commands are not referenced in
this section. Refer to the GPIB programming manual for information on using the signal modulation commands.
Accessing
Modulation
Modes
The modulation modes are all accessed from the
main Modulation menu; press Modulation . The
main Modulation menu is displayed (below).
This menu allows you to access the available modulation modes.
NOTE
Modulation status menus may display in this
menu if previously left open. The examples in
this manual are given relative to a system-reset
state.
3-92
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Amplitude
Modulation
Operating
Modes
Signal Modulation
The signal generator has two AM operating
modes—Linear AM and Log AM. In Linear AM
mode, sensitivity is continuously variable from
0 %/V to 100 %/V. The amplitude of the RF output
changes linearly as the AM input changes.
In Log AM mode, sensitivity is continuously variable
from 0 dB/V to 25 dB/V. The amplitude of the RF
output changes exponentially as the AM input
changes.
Providing
Amplitude
Modulation
The following are the menu selections to provide
amplitude modulation of the output signal using a
modulating signal from both the internal AM generator and an external source.
Press MODULATION . At the resulting main modulation menu display, press AM . The AM Status
menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Turn the selected AM mode On or Off
q
Edit the AM Depth and Rate
q
Select the AM Waveform
q
Select the modulating signal source
q
Select the Linear AM or Log AM operating
mode
Internal AM Source
Press Internal / External to select the internal AM
generator as the modulating signal source.
Press On / Off to turn AM on and off. The Internal
AM status display will reflect your selection as On
or Off; the AM modulation status area will reflect
your selection as Internal On or Off.
MG369XB OM
3-93
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Press Edit Depth to open the AM Depth parameter,
then edit the current value using the cursor control
keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using
the keypad and the appropriate terminator key
(kHz/ms/STEPS for Linear; MHz/ms/dB for Log). The
AM Depth range is 0% to 100% in Linear and
0 dB to 25 dB in Log. To close the open AM Depth
parameter, press Edit Depth or make another menu
selection.
Reduce Rate
This warning message is displayed
when the AM Rate is set >100 kHz
for a non-sine wave modulating
waveform. Amplitude modulation
of the output signal will continue
but the modulating waveform may
be distorted.
Press Edit Rate to open the AM Rate parameter,
then edit the current value using the cursor control
keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using
the keypad and the appropriate terminator key. The
AM rate range is 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave and
0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp
waveforms. To close the open AM Rate parameter,
press Edit Rate or make another menu selection.
Press Select Wave... to access the Modulation
Waveform Selection menu (below)
sine wave
square wave
positive ramp
negative ramp
GN
Gaussian noise
UN
uniform noise
triangle wave
This menu displays the modulation waveforms (description to the left) that are available from the AM
generator. Use the cursor control keys to highlight
the desired modulation waveform, then press Select
to select the highlighted waveform. The AM Status
display will reflect your selection.
Press < Previous to return to the main AM Status
menu display.
Press Internal / External to select the source of the
modulating signal. Internal selects the modulating
signal from the internal AM generator; external selects the modulating signal from an external source.
The AM status display will reflect your selection.
3-94
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Signal Modulation
Press Log / Linear to select the AM operating mode.
When Internal AM is active, the AM Depth display
will reflect your selection as XX dB (Log) or XX %
(Linear). When External AM is active, the AM Sensitivity display will reflect your selection as XX dB/V
(Log) or XX %/V (Linear).
Press < Previous to return to the AM Status menu
display.
External AM Source
To provide amplitude modulation of the output signal using a modulating signal from an external
source, first set up the external signal generator and
connect it to the MG369XB rear panel AM IN connector.
Next, access the AM Status menu (page 3-93) and
press Internal / External to select the external source
for the modulating signal.
The External AM Status menu (below) is then displayed.
This menu contains the external AM status window
that shows the current menu selections and the
measured AM Depth (The AM depth measurement
function measures the voltage of the external modulation signal and calculates the percentage modulation value). The menu lets you perform the
following:
MG369XB OM
q
Turn the selected AM mode On or Off
q
Edit the AM Sensitivity
q
Select the modulating signal source
q
Select the Linear AM or Log AM operating
mode
3-95
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Press On / Off to turn AM on and off. The External
AM status display will reflect your selection as On
or Off; the AM modulation status area will reflect
your selection as External On or Off.
ERR
This error message is displayed
when the external AM modulating
signal exceeds the input voltage
range. The message “Reduce AM Input Level” also appears at the bottom of the AM status display. AM is
turned off until the modulating signal is within the input voltage
range.
Press Edit Sensitivity to open the AM Sensitivity parameter, then edit the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new
value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key (kHz/ms/STEPS for Linear; MHz/ms/dB
for Log). The AM Sensitivity range is 0 %/V to
100 %/V in Linear and 0 dB/V to 25 dB/V in Log. To
close the open AM Sensitivity parameter, press Edit
Sensitivity or make another menu selection.
Press Internal / External to select the source of the
modulating signal. Internal selects the modulating
signal from the internal AM generator; external selects the modulating signal from an external source.
The AM status display will reflect your selection.
Press Log / Linear to select the AM operating mode.
When Internal AM is active, the AM Depth display
will reflect your selection as XX dB (Log) or XX %
(Linear). When External AM is active, the AM Sensitivity display will reflect your selection as XX dB/V
(Log) or XX %/V (Linear).
Press < Previous to return to the AM Status menu
display.
Frequency
Modulation
Operating
Modes
The signal generator has four FM operating modes:
Locked, Locked Low-Noise, Unlocked Narrow, and
Unlocked Wide. In the Locked and Locked
Low-Noise FM modes, frequency modulation of the
output signal is accomplished by summing the modulating signal into the FM control path of the YIG
phase-lock loop.
In Locked FM mode, the maximum FM deviation is
the lesser of ±10 MHz or the rate times 300 for
1 kHz to 8 MHz rates. In Locked Low-Noise FM
mode, the maximum FM deviation is the lesser of
±10 MHz or the rate times three for 50 kHz to
8 MHz rates.
3-96
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Signal Modulation
In Unlocked FM modes, the YIG phase-lock loop is
disabled to allow for peak FM deviations of up to
100 MHz. In Unlocked Narrow mode, frequency
modulation is obtained by applying the modulating
signal to the fine tuning coil of the YIG-tuned
oscillator. Unlocked Narrow FM mode allows
maximum deviations of ±10 MHz for DC to 8 MHz
rates.
In Unlocked Wide mode, frequency modulation is accomplished by applying the modulating signal to the
main tuning coil of the YIG-tuned oscillator. Unlocked Wide FM mode allows maximum deviations
of ±100 MHz for DC to 100 Hz rates.
Providing
Frequency
Modulation
Press MODULATION . At the resulting main Modulation menu display, press FM . The FM Status
menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
MG369XB OM
q
Turn the selected FM mode On or Off
q
Edit the FM Deviation and Rate
q
Select the FM Waveform
q
Select the modulating signal source
q
Access the FM Mode menu
3-97
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Internal FM Source
Once you have pressed Internal / External to select
the internal FM generator as the modulating signal
source, the Internal FM Status menu (above) is displayed.
Press On / Off to turn FM on and off. The Internal
FM status display will reflect your selection as On
or Off; the FM modulation status area will reflect
your selection as Internal On or Off.
Press Edit Deviation to open the FM Deviation parameter, then edit the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new
value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key. The FM Deviation range is 10 kHz to
20 MHz for Locked, Locked Low-Noise, and Unlocked Narrow FM modes and 100 kHz to 100 MHz
for Unlocked Wide FM mode. To close the open FM
Deviation parameter, press Edit Deviation or make
another menu selection.
Press Edit Rate to open the FM Rate parameter,
then edit the current value using the cursor control
keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using
the keypad and the appropriate terminator key. The
FM rate range is 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave and
0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp
waveforms. To close the open FM Rate parameter,
press Edit Rate or make another menu selection.
Press Select Wave... to access the Modulation
Waveform Selection menu (below).
3-98
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
sine wave
square wave
positive ramp
Signal Modulation
This menu displays the modulation waveforms (description to the left) that are available from the FM
generator. Use the cursor control keys to highlight
the desired modulation waveform, then press Select
to select the highlighted waveform. The FM Status
display will reflect your selection.
negative ramp
GN
Gaussian noise
UN
uniform noise
triangle wave
Press < Previous to return to the main FM Status
menu display.
Press Internal / External to select the source of the
modulating signal. Internal selects the modulating
signal from the internal FM generator; External selects the modulating signal from an external source.
The FM status display will reflect your selection.
Press the menu soft-key Mode > . The FM Mode
menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you select the FM operating mode.
UNLOCKED
When Unlocked Narrow FM or Unlocked Wide FM is selected ON, this
warning message is displayed on all
menu displays to remind you that
t he carrier frequency is not
phase-locked.
MG369XB OM
Press Locked Low Noise to select the Locked
Low-Noise FM operating mode; press Locked to select the Locked FM operating mode; press
Unlocked Narrow to select the Unlocked Narrow
FM operating mode; press Unlocked Wide to select
the Unlocked Wide FM operating mode. The FM status display will reflect your selection.
Press < Previous to return to the FM Status menu
display.
3-99
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
External FM Source
To provide frequency modulation of the output signal using a modulating signal from an external
source, first set up the external signal generator and
connect it to the MG369XB rear panel FM IN connector.
Next, access the FM Status menu (page 3-97) and
press Internal / External to select the external source
for the modulating signal. The External FM Status
menu (below) is then displayed.
This menu contains the external FM status window
that shows the current menu selections and the
measured FM Deviation (The FM deviation measurement function measures the voltage of the external modulation signal and calculates the peak
frequency deviation).
ERR
This error message is displayed
when the external FM modulating
signal exceeds the input voltage
range. The message “Reduce FM Input Level” also appears at the bottom of the FM status display. FM is
turned off until the modulating signal is within the input voltage
range.
3-100
Press On / Off to turn FM on and off. The External
FM status display will reflect your selection as On
or Off; the FM modulation status area will reflect
your selection as External On or Off.
Press Edit Sensitivity to open the FM Sensitivity parameter, then edit the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter an new
value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key. The FM Sensitivity range is ±10 kHz/V to
±20 MHz/V for Locked, Locked Low-Noise, and
Unlocked Narrow FM modes and ±100 kHz/V to
±100 MHz/V for Unlocked Wide FM mode. To close
the open FM Sensitivity parameter, press
Edit Sensitivity or make another menu selection.
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Signal Modulation
Press Mode > to access the FM Mode Selection
menu (below).
This menu lets you select the FM operating mode.
Press Locked Low Noise to select the Locked
Low-Noise FM operating mode; press Locked to select the Locked FM operating mode; press
Unlocked Narrow to select the Unlocked Narrow
FM operating mode; or press Unlocked Wide to select the Unlocked Wide FM operating mode. The FM
status display will reflect your selection.
UNLOCKED
When Unlocked Narrow FM or Unlocked Wide FM is selected ON, this
warning message is displayed on all
menu displays to remind you that
the carrier frequency is not phaselocked.
Press < Previous to return to the FM Status menu
display.
Phase
Modulation
Operating
Modes
The MG369XB can provide phase modulation (FM)
of the output signal using modulating signals from
either its internal FM generator or an external
source.
The MG369XB has two FM operating modes—Narrow FM and Wide FM. In Narrow FM mode, the
maximum FM deviation is the lesser of ±3 radians
or ±5 MHz for DC to 8 MHz rates. In Wide FM
mode, the maximum FM deviation is the lesser of
±400 radians or ±10 MHz for DC to 1 MHz rates.
NOTE
FM and FM can not be active simultaneously.
FM and FM share the same rear panel input
connector and internal signal generator.
MG369XB OM
3-101
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Providing
Phase
Modulation
The following are the menu selections to provide
phase modulation of the output signal using a modulating signal from both the internal FM generator
and an external source.
Press MODULATION . At the resulting main modulation menu display, press FM. The FM Status
menu (below) is displayed.
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Turn the selected FM mode On or Off
q
Edit the FM Deviation and Rate
q
Select the FM Waveform
q
Select the modulating signal source
q
Access the FM Mode menu
Internal FM Source
Press Internal / External to select the internal FM
generator as the modulating signal source.
Press On / Off to turn the FM on and off. The Internal FM status display will reflect your selection as
On or Off; the FM modulation status area will reflect your selection as Internal On or Off.
Press Edit Deviation to open the FM Deviation parameter, then edit the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new
value using the keypad and the GHz/Sec/dBm terminator key. The FM Deviation range is 0.0025 to 5 radians in Narrow FM mode and 0.25 to 500 radians
in Wide FM mode. To close the open FM Deviation
parameter, press Edit Deviation or make another
menu selection.
3-102
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Reduce Rate
This warning message is displayed
when the FM Rate is set >100 kHz
for a non-sine wave modulating
waveform. Phase modulation of the
output signal will continue but the
modulating waveform may be distorted.
Signal Modulation
Press Edit Rate to open the FM Rate parameter,
then edit the current value using the cursor control
keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using
the keypad and the appropriate terminator key. The
FM Rate range is 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave and
0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp
waveforms. To close the open FM Rate parameter,
press Edit Rate or make another menu selection.
Press Select Wave... to access the Modulation
Waveform Selection menu (below).
sine wave
square wave
positive ramp
negative ramp
GN
Gaussian noise
UN
uniform noise
This menu displays the modulation waveforms (to
the left) that are available from the FM generator.
Use the cursor control keys to highlight the desired
modulation waveform, then press Select . The FM
Status display will reflect your selection.
Press < Previous to return to the FM Status menu
display.
To select the FM operating mode, press Mode > .
The FM Mode menu (below) is displayed.
triangle wave
Press Narrow to select the Narrow FM operating
mode; press Wide to select the Wide FM operating
mode. The FM status display will reflect your selection.
MG369XB OM
3-103
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Press < Previous to return to the FM Status menu
display.
External FM Source
To provide phase modulation of the output signal
using a modulating signal from an external source,
first set up the external signal generator and connect it to the MG369XB rear panel FM/FM IN connector.
Next, from the FM Status menu, press Internal / External to select the external source for the modulating signal. The External FM Status menu (below) is
then displayed.
This menu contains the external FM status window
that shows the current menu selections and the
measured FM deviation (The FM deviation measurement function measures the voltage of the external modulation signal and calculates the peak
frequency deviation). This menu lets you perform
the following:
3-104
q
Turn the selected FM mode On or Off
q
Edit the FM sensitivity
q
Select the modulating signal source
q
Access the FM Mode menu
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
ERR
This error message is displayed
when the external FM modulating
signal exceeds the input voltage
range. The message “Reduce FM Input Level” also appears at the bottom of the FM status display. FM is
turned off until the modulating signal is within the input voltage
range.
Signal Modulation
Press On / Off to turn FM on and off. The external
FM status display will reflect your selection as On
or Off; the FM modulation status area will reflect
your selection as External On or Off.
Press Edit Sensitivity to open the FM sensitivity parameter, then edit the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new
value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key. The FM Sensitivity range is ±0.0025 radians/V to ±5 radians/V for Narrow FM mode and
±0.25 radians/V to ±500 radians/V for Wide FM
mode. To close the open FM Sensitivity parameter,
press Edit Sensitivity or make another menu selection.
To select the FM operating mode, press Mode > .
The FM Mode menu (below) is displayed.
Press Narrow to select the Narrow FM operating
mode; press Wide to select the Wide FM operating
mode. The FM status display will reflect your selection.
Press < Previous to return to the FM Status menu
display.
MG369XB OM
3-105
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
The MG369XB provides pulse modulation of the
output signal using modulating signals from either
its internal pulse generator or an external source.
To provide pulse modulation of the output signal using a modulating signal from an external source, set
up the external pulse generator and connect it to the
MG369XB rear panel PULSE TRIG IN connector.
Pulse
Modulation
Operating
Modes
The internal pulse generator has four pulse modes–
single, doublet (double pulse), triplet (triple pulse),
and quadruplet (quadruple pulse). Individual pulse
widths (W1, W2, W3, and W4) and delays (D1, D2,
D3, and D4) can be set for each of the pulses in a
mode.
PULSE
SYNC OUT
PERIOD
W2
W1
W3
W4
OUTPUT
D1
D2
D3
D4
The internal pulse generator can be internally triggered, externally triggered, internally and externally triggered with delay, and externally gated.
There is also a composite mode in which an external
pulse is summed with the internal pulse to pulse
modulate the output signal.
Whenever the internal pulse generator is internally
triggered, a TTL compatible signal that is synchronized to the internal pulse modulation output is
available at the rear panel PULSE SYNC OUT connector.
NOTE
40 MHz pulse clock rates are only
available with Option 24; 100 MHz
pulse clock rates are only available
with Option 26.
The internal pulse generator has two selectable
clock rates—100 MHz (or 40 MHz with Option 24)
and 10 MHz. The 100 MHz (or 40 MHz with
Option 24) clock rate produces higher resolution
pulses and allows higher Pulse Repetition Frequencies (PRFs); the 10 MHz clock rate produces
lower resolution pulses and lower PRFs.
External signals or pulses to trigger or gate the internal pulse generator can be applied to the rear
panel PULSE TRIGGER IN connector.
3-106
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Providing
Pulse
Modulation
Signal Modulation
The following are the menu selections to provide
pulse modulation of the output signal using a modulating signal from both the internal pulse generator
and an external source.
Press Modulation . At the resulting Modulation
menu display, press Pulse . The Internal Pulse Status menu (below) is displayed.
This menu contains the Pulse Status window that
shows the current menu selections. This menu lets
you perform the following:
ERR
This error message is displayed
when a pulse parameter setting is
invalid for the current pulse modulation state. A listing of invalid parameter settings is provided in Table 6-2, page 6-8.
MG369XB OM
q
Turn pulse modulation on and off
q
Edit the Period (or PRF) and Width/Delay List
q
Access the Step Delay menu
q
Select the modulating signal source
q
Access the additional Pulse Status menus
Internal Pulse Source
Press Internal / External to select the internal pulse
generator as the modulating signal source.
Press On / Off to turn pulse modulation on and off.
The Internal Pulse status display will reflect your
selection as On or Off.
3-107
Signal Modulation
NOTE
At a 100 MHz pulse clock rate, the
pulse period must be 50 ns longer
than the pulse widths + delays; at a
40 MHz pulse clock rate, the pulse
period must be 125 ns longer than
the pulse widths + delays; at a
10 MHz pulse clock rate, the pulse
period must be 500 ns longer than
the pulse widths + delays.
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Press Edit Period to open the Pulse Period parameter. (If you had selected PRF instead of Period at the
Internal Pulse Configuration menu, the soft-key
would read Edit PRF and pressing it would open
the PRF parameter.) Edit the current value using
the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a
new value using the keypad and the appropriate
terminator key. To close the Pulse Period parameter,
press Edit Period (or Edit PRF ) or make another
menu selection.
Press Wdth / Dly List... to display the Pulse
Width/Delay List menu (below) of current Pulse
Width (W1-W4) and Delay (D1-D4) parameter
settings.
NOTE
Pulse Delay (D1) is only active
when Delayed or Triggered w/delay
triggering mode is selected.
To change the current value of a parameter, use the
cursor control keys to select the parameter, then
press Edit Selected . Edit the current value using
the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a
new value using the keypad and the appropriate
terminator key. To close the open parameter, press
Edit Selected or < Previous .
When the Delayed or Triggered w/delay trigger
mode is selected, the menu display adds the soft-key
Step Delay . This soft-key lets you access menus for
setting the step delay parameters and turning the
Stepped Delay Mode on and off. The Stepped Delay
Mode is described on page 3-113.
3-108
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Signal Modulation
Press More > to access the additional Internal
Pulse Status menu display (with Option 26, below
left; with Option 24, below right).
This menu allows you to perform the following:
q
Access the Pulse Mode menu
q
Access the Trigger Mode menu
q
Configure the internal pulse display
(Period or PRF)
q
Select the polarity of the pulse input signal
(Low or High) that turns on the RF
q
Select the pulse generator’s clock rate
Press Mode... to access the Pulse Mode menu display (below).
This menu displays the pulse modes (Single, Doublet, Triplet, and Quadruplet) that are available
from the pulse generator. Use the cursor control
keys to highlight the desired pulse mode, then select
it by pressing Select . The Internal Pulse Status
display will reflect your selection.
Press < Previous to return to the additional Internal Pulse Status menu display.
MG369XB OM
3-109
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
From the additional Internal Pulse Status menu,
press Trigger... to access the Trigger Mode menu
display (below).
This menu lets you select the mode of triggering for
the internal pulse generator. (Each trigger mode is
described and illustrated on page 3-111.)
Use the cursor control keys to highlight the desired
trigger mode, then press Select to select it. The Internal Pulse Status display will reflect your selection.
When you select the Gated, Triggered, or Triggered
w/delay mode, the menu display adds the menu
soft-keys Trig. ­ and Trig. ¯ (below).
Press these keys to select whether the pulse generator is triggered by the rising or falling edge of the
external trigger pulse.
Press < Previous to return to the additional Internal Pulse Status menu display.
3-110
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Free Run–The pulse generator produces Single, Doublet, Triplet, or Quadruplet
pulse modulation waveforms at the internal pulse repetition rate. Pulse delay
(D1) is not available in this trigger mode.
Delayed–The pulse generator produces Single, Doublet, Triplet, or Quadruplet
pulse modulation waveforms delayed by pulse delay (D1) at the internal pulse
repetition rate.
Triggered–The pulse generator is triggered by an external trigger to produce
Single, Doublet, Triplet, or Quadruplet pulse modulation waveforms. Pulse delay (D1) is not available in this trigger mode.
Triggered w/delay–The pulse generator is triggered by an external trigger to
produce Single, Doublet, Triplet, or Quadruplet pulse modulation waveforms delayed by pulse delay (D1).
Gated– An external pulse gates the internal pulse generator on and off. When
gated on, the pulse generator produces a Single pulse modulation waveform at
the internal pulse repetition rate. Doublet, Triplet, and Quadruplet pulse modes
are not available in this trigger mode.
For proper operation, the period of the external pulse must be greater than the
sum of the pulse repetition rate and pulse width of the internal pulse modulation waveform. To prevent relative timing jitter, the external gating pulse
source can be synchronized with the internal pulse generator by using the
10 MHz REF OUT signal output (MG369XB rear panel) as a frequency reference
for the external generator.
Signal Modulation
F R E E R U N
P U L S E
S Y N C O U T
O U T P U T
D E L A Y E D
P U L S E
S Y N C O U T
O U T P U T
D 1
D 1
T R IG G E R E D
E X T E R N A L
T R IG G E R
O U T P U T
T R IG G E R E D W /D E L A Y
E X T E R N A L
T R IG G E R
O U T P U T
D 1
D 1
D 1
G A T E D
E X T E R N A L
P U L S E
O U T P U T
MG369XB OM
3-111
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Press PRF / Period to select the display of Pulse
PRF or Pulse Period on the additional Internal
Pulse Status display. Selecting Pulse Period represents the pulse period as time. Selecting Pulse PRF
(Pulse Repetition Frequency) represents the pulse
period as a frequency.
You can enter the pulse repetition rate as either
time or frequency with these two choices. The Internal Pulse Status display will reflect your selection.
Press Low RF On / High RF On to select the polarity
of the signal (Low or High) that turns the RF on.
The Internal Pulse Status display will reflect your
selection.
Press Clock 100 / 10 (with Option 26) or
Clock 40 / 10 (with Option 24) to select the pulse
generator’s clock rate. The soft-key label is
highlighted (in reverse video) to reflect your
selection. The example below shows a clock rate
selection of 100 MHz (below left) and 40 MHz (below
right).
Press < Previous to return to the Internal Pulse
Status menu.
3-112
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Signal Modulation
Stepped Delay Mode
The Stepped Delay Mode lets you automatically increment or decrement the Pulse Delay 1 (D1) value
according to step delay parameters. The mode is
only available when the Delayed or Triggered w/delay triggering mode is selected. Selecting either triggering mode adds the soft-key Step Delay > to the
Internal Pulse Status menu. Refer to page 3-110 for
setting the triggering options.
From the Internal Pulse menu, press Step Delay >
to access the Step Delay Mode menu (below).
This menu allows you to perform the following:
NOTE
If the set Step Delay parameters result in a fractional number of increments, then the last (fractional) one
is not taken.
q
Turn step delay on/off
q
Edit the step delay parameters
q
Set the length of time a Delay 1 (D1) time is
applied before it is incremented or decremented by the step size
Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
the current value using the cursor control keys or
the rotary data knob or enter a new value using the
key pad and appropriate termination key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or make another menu
selection.
Press On/Off to turn the Stepped Delay Mode on
and off.
Press Start Delay to open the Delay 1 (D1) start
time parameter.
Press Stop Delay to open the Delay 1 (D1) end time
parameter.
MG369XB OM
3-113
Signal Modulation
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Press Step Size to open the step size time parameter.
Press Step Time to open the dwell-time-per-step parameter, then edit the current value using the cursor control key, rotary data knob, or enter a new
value using the keypad and appropriate termination
key. To close the open parameter, press Step Time
or make another menu selection.
Press < Previous to return to the Internal Pulse
Status menu display.
Start Delay and End Delay times may be from lower
to higher times or vice versa.
The Step Size time will be applied as an increment
or a decrement as appropriate.
During pulse modulation, when the step delay mode
is on, both Start Delay and Stop Delay times are error checked as Delay 1 (D1) times against other
pulse parameters. Step Size time is checked against
the Start Delay and Stop Delay times and must be
no greater than the difference between Start Delay
and Stop Delay.
3-114
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Signal Modulation
External Pulse Source
To provide pulse modulation of the output signal
using a modulating signal from an external source,
first set up the external pulse generator and connect
it to the MG369XB rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN
connector.
Next, access the Internal Pulse Status menu
(page 3-107) and press Internal / External to select
the external source for the modulating signal. The
External Pulse Status menu (below) is then displayed.
This menu contains the external pulse status
window that shows the current menu selections.
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Turn the external pulse modulation on and off
q
Select the modulating signal source
q
Select the polarity of the pulse input signal
(Low or High) that turns on the RF
Press On / Off to turn pulse modulation on and off.
The External Pulse Status display will reflect your
selection as On or Off; the Pulse modulation status
area will reflect your selection as External On or
Off.
Press Internal / External to select the source of the
modulating signal. The External Pulse Status
display will reflect your selection.
Press Low RF On / High RF On to select the polarity
of the signal (Low or High) that turns the RF on.
The External Pulse Status display will reflect your
selection.
MG369XB OM
3-115
Internal Power Meter (Option 8)
3-17
Internal Power
Meter (Option 8)
Local (Front Panel) Operation
The internal power meter function, added by Option 8, lets you measure the power from a test device and display its value in the lower
right corner of the level parameters area of the front panel LCD. The
power measurement function has a range of +16 dBm to –35 dBm and
is compatible with Anritsu 560-7, 5400-71, and 6400-71 series detectors.
To make a measurement of the power from a test
device using the internal power measurement function, first connect the detector to the test device and
to the rear panel POWER METER connector.
Next, press the SYSTEM key. At the System menu
(below), press Measure Power to enable the power
measurement function.
During operation, the power level is displayed near
the Level parameter in all main menu displays (below).
If the power level exceeds the operating limitations
of the instrument or RF detector, the word Pwr
Underrange is displayed to indicate an under range
condition; the word Pwr Overrange is displayed to indicate an over range condition.
3-116
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
Internal Power Meter (Option 8)
The internal power meter’s accuracy can be improved by enabling a power meter offset or by running an internal power meter calibration routine.
Enable a power meter offset by selecting Pwr Meter
Offset and entering a non-zero power level offset
value (below).
The word Offset is displayed when a non-zero offset
value is entered (below).
MG369XB OM
3-117
Internal Power Meter (Option 8)
Local (Front Panel) Operation
To calibrate the internal power meter, connect the
RF detector to the MG369XB’s RF Output connector
and select Detector Cal > to enter the Detector Calibration menu (below).
From the Detector Calibration menu, press Start Cal
to begin the calibration (below).
After the calibration completes, the correction can
be enabled by pressing the Enable key. The status is
displayed in the Detector Calibration menu as On or
Off.
To disable the calibration correction, press Enable
again.
Press <Previous to return to the System menu.
To disable the power measurement function, press
Measure Power again.
3-118
MG369XB OM
Local (Front Panel) Operation
3-18
Scan Modulation
(Option 20)
Scan Modulation (Option 20)
The internal scan modulator, added by Option 20, lets you amplitude
modulate output signals from 2 to 18 GHz at modulation depths up to
60 dB. Scan modulation is accomplished using a modulating signal
from an external source and is in addition to the normal amplitude
modulation described in Section 3-12.
To provide amplitude modulation of the output signal using the internal scan modulator, first set up
the external modulating signal generator and connect it to the MG369XB’s rear panel SCAN MOD IN
connector.
Next, press MODULATION, then Scan to go to the
Scan Status menu (below).
Press On/Off to turn scan modulation on and off. The
Scan status display and the Scan modulation status
area will reflect your selection as On or Off.
Control the scan modulation depth by varying the
level of the external modulating signal. The scan
modulator has a fixed sensitivity of –10 dB/V. An external modulating signal level of 6 volts produces
the maximum modulation depth of –60 dB.
MG369XB OM
3-119/3-122
Chapter 4
Local Operation—Menu Maps
Table of Contents
4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2
Menu Map Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Chapter 4
Local Operation—Menu Maps
4-1
Introduction
This chapter provides menu maps that support the MG369XB front
panel operating instructions found in Chapter 3. It includes menu
maps for all of the frequency and power level modes of operation. In
addition, a menu map for system configuration is also provided.
4-2
Menu Map
Description
A menu map shows the menu key selections and instrument menu displays for a particular mode of signal generator operation. The menu
displays are shown as they appear on the instrument and are linked
together to show the sequence of menu selection. A brief description of
the function of each menu's soft-keys is provided. If a menu soft-key
selects another menu, then it is shown linked to that menu. Figure 4-1, on page 4-5, is a sample menu map annotated to identify the
key elements.
The following is a list of the menu maps contained in this chapter.
Figure
MG369XB OM
Title
Page
4-1
Sample Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-2
CW Frequency Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3
Analog Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . 4-7
4-4
Step Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map. . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-5
Manual Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . 4-9
4-6
List Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-7
Fixed Power Level Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-8
CW Power Sweep Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-9
Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode Menu Map . . . . 4-13
4-10
Leveling Modes Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-11
Amplitude Modulation Modes Menu Map . . . . . . . 4-15
4-12
Frequency Modulation Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-13
Phase Modulation Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-14
Pulse Modulation Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-15
System Configuration Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-3/4-4
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
SAMPLE
MENU MAP
M a in M e n u K e y
P o in ts to th e m e n u d is p la y e d w h e n e v e r
th e m e n u s o ft-k e y is d e p r e s s e d
T y p ic a l M e n u S o ft-K e y
F u n c tio n a l D e s c r ip tio n
M a in M e n u D is p la y
T o S la v e F r e q u e n c y L is t
(n o t s h o w n )
S e t S la v e D F F r e q u e n c y
E d it C u r r e n t F r e q u e n c y
C o p y C u rre n t F re q u e n c y
a n d P o w e r to L is t In d e x
F re q u e n c y
E d it C u
T o
(n o
T o
(n o
M o d e S o ft-K e y s
(a p p e a ra n c e c h a n g e s to
s h o w c u r r e n t s e le c tio n )
A n
p re
w h
d is
m e
rre n
P h a
t s h
C W
t s h
a rro
s s in
ile in
p la y
n u
t P
s e
o w
R
o w
S e
S e
P o
M a
o w e r L e v e l
O ffs e t M e n u
n )
a m p M e n u
n )
w
h e r
g th is
th e c
s a p a
e in d ic
m e n u
u rre n t
ra m e te
a te s
s o ft
m o d
r c o
P re s e t P a ra m e te r S o ft-K e y s
(a p p e a ra n c e c h a n g e s to
s h o w c u r r e n t s e le c tio n )
tp
g g
tp
g g
it
u t
e d
u t
e d
C u
N e x t
F re q u
P r e v io
F re q u
rre n t P
v e M
v e A
L e v e
/S la v
a in P o w e r L e v e l
lte r n a te S w e e p
l
e O n /O ff
th a t
-k e y
e
n tro l
T a g /U
F re q u
E d it S
F re q u
O u tp u
F re q u
E d it C u r r e n t F r e q u e n c y
O u
T a
O u
T a
E d
t S la
t S la
w e r
s te r
e n c y
u s
e n c y
o w e r L e v e l
N o te : In
th
fu
th
a p
m o s
a t c o
n c tio
e fu n
p e a r
t c
n t
n
c t
a n
a s e s
r o ls a
O N ; p
io n O
c e to
, p re s s
m e n u
r e s s in
F F . T h
s h o w
in g
fu n
g th
e s
th e
n ta g S e le c te d
e n c y
e le c te d
e n c y
t S e le c te d
e n c y
a m e n u s o ft-k e y
c tio n tu r n s th e
e s o ft-k e y a g a in tu r n s
o ft-k e y la b e ls c h a n g e
O N /O F F c o n d itio n .
Figure 4-1. Sample Menu Map (Annotated)
MG369XB OM
4-5
CW
FREQUENCY MODE
F re q u e n c y
E d it C u r r e n t F r e q u e n c y
C o p y C u rre n t F re q u e n c y
a n d P o w e r to L is t In d e x
E d it H ig h lig h te d
F re q u e n c y
S e t S la v e D F F r e q u e n c y
S e
S e
P o
M a
E d it C u r r e n t
P o w e r L e v e l
E d it C u r r e n t F r e q u e n c y
O u
T a
O u
T a
E d
tp
g g
tp
g g
it
u t
e d
u t
e d
C u
N e x t
F re q u
P r e v io
F re q u
rre n t P
e n c y
u s
e n c y
o w e r L e v e l
t S la
t S la
w e r
s te r
v e M
v e A
L e v e
/S la v
a in P o w e r L e v e l
lte r n a te S w e e p
l
e O n /O ff
T u rn C W
R a m p O n /O ff
O n /O ff
E d it C W
T im e
R a m p S w e e p
E d it P h a s e O ffs e t
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
S e t S la v e F r e q u e n c y
O ffs e t in 3 6 0 B V N A M o d e
S e t S la v e P o w e r L e v e l
in 3 6 0 B V N A M o d e
Z e r o P h a s e O ffs e t D is p la y
T a g /U
F re q u
E d it S
F re q u
O u tp u
F re q u
n ta g S e le c te d
e n c y
e le c te d
e n c y
t S e le c te d
e n c y
NOTES
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-20, for CW frequency mode operating instructions.
Refer to Chapter 7, page 7-4, for master-slave operating instructions.
Figure 4-2. CW Frequency Mode Menu Map
4-6
MG369XB OM
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
ANALOG SWEEP
FREQUENCY MODE
Frequency
Edit Current Start Frequency
Edit Current Stop Frequency
Edit Current Sweep Time
Select Auto Trigger
Select External Trigger
Select Single Trigger
Triggers a Single Sweep
Edit Current Power Level
Edit Alternate Sweep Start Frequency
Edit Alternate Sweep Stop Frequency
Alternate Sweep On/Off
Alternate Sweep ON
Edit Main Sweep Power Level
Edit Alternate Sweep Power Level
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-26,
for analog sweep frequency
mode operating instructions.
Figure 4-3. Analog Sweep Menu Map
MG369XB OM
4-7
STEP SWEEP
FREQUENCY MODE
F re q u e n c y
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
E d it S ta r t F r e q u e n c y
E d it S w e e p T im e
O n / O ff
E d it E n d F r e q u e n c y
E d it N u m b e r o f S te p s
O n / O ff
O n / O ff
E d it D w e ll T im e
E d it S te p S iz e
S e le c t L o g o r L in e a r S w e e p
E d it P o w e r L e v e l
E d it
S ta r
E d it
E n d
A lt
t F r
A lt
F re
S w
e q
S w
q u
e e p
u e n c y
e e p
e n c y
O n / O ff
E d
P o
E d
P o
E d it E n d F r e q u e n c y
T a g /U
M a rk e
E d it S
M a rk e
In te n s
E d it P o w e r L e v e l
V id e o M a r k e r s O n /O ff
E d it S ta r t F r e q u e n c y
C a n B e S e le c te d
F ro m A n y S te p
M e n u D is p la y
n ta
r F
e le
r F
ity
g S e le c
re q u e n c
c te d
re q u e n c
M a rk e rs
it M
w e
it A
w e
a in
r L e
lt S
r L e
S w e e p
v e l
w e e p
v e l
te d
y
y
O n /O ff
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-26,
for step sweep frequency
mode operating instructions.
Figure 4-4. Step Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map
4-8
MG369XB OM
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
MANUAL SWEEP
FREQUENCY MODE
F re q u e n c y
E d it S ta r t F r e q u e n c y
E d it E n d F r e q u e n c y
E d it S te p S iz e
E d it N u m b e r o f S te p s
E d it S ta r t F r e q u e n c y
E d it E n d F r e q u e n c y
E d it P o w e r L e v e l
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-32,
for manual sweep frequency
mode operating instructions.
Figure 4-5. Manual Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map
MG369XB OM
4-9
LIST SWEEP
FREQUENCY MODE
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
E d it H ig h lig h te d In d e x F r e q u e n c y
P r e s s T o D is p la y P r e v io u s 2 0 F r e q u e n c ie s
P r e s s T o D is p la y N e x t 2 0 F r e q u e n c ie s
In s e r t D e fa u lt F r e q u e n c y A n d
P o w e r L e v e l a t C u r r e n t L is t In d e x
D e le te C u r r e n t L is t In d e x
E d it H ig h lig h te d In d e x P o w e r L e v e l
F re q u e n c y
P r e s s T o D is p la y P r e v io u s 1 0 P o w e r L e v e ls
E d it L is t In d e x
P r e s s to C a lc u la te th e S e ttin g s fo r
A ll L is t In d e x F r e q u e n c ie s a n d P o w e r L e v e ls
P r e s s T o D is p la y N e x t 1 0 P o w e r L e v e ls
In s e r t D e fa u lt F r e q u e n c y A n d
P o w e r L e v e l a t C u r r e n t L is t In d e x
D e le te C u r r e n t L is t In d e x
E d it L is t In d e x
C u rre n t F re q u e n c y
E d it S ta r t In d e x
S e le c ts A u to T r ig g e r
E d it S to p In d e x
S e le c ts E x te r n a l T r ig g e r
E d it D w e ll T im e
S e le c ts S in g le T r ig g e r
S e le c ts M a n u a l T r ig g e r
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-42,
for list sweep frequency mode
operating instructions.
Figure 4-6. List Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map
4-10
MG369XB OM
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
FIXED POWER
LEVEL MODE
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-51 for
fixed power level mode operating
instructions.
Figure 4-7. Fixed Power Level Mode Menu Map
MG369XB OM
4-11
CW POWER
SWEEP MODE
L e v e l
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
E d it S ta r t P o w e r L e v e l
O n /O ff
E d it E n d P o w e r L e v e l
O n /O ff
E d it D w e ll T Im e
O n /O ff
E d it S te p S iz e
E d it N u m b e r o f S te p s
S e t P o w e r L e v e l to d B m
( lo g )
S e t P o w e r L e v e l to d B m V ( lo g )
E d it S ta r t P o w e r L e v e l
S e t P o w e r L e v e l to m V ( lin e a r )
E d it E n d P o w e r L e v e l
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-56, for
CW power sweep mode operating instructions.
Figure 4-8. CW Power Sweep Mode Menu Map
4-12
MG369XB OM
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
SWEEP FREQUENCY/
STEP POWER MODE
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-61, for
sweep frequency/step power mode
operating instructions.
Figure 4-9. Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode Menu Map
MG369XB OM
4-13
LEVELING
MODES
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
S e le c
(D e fa
S e le c
E x te r
S e le c
P o w e
S e le c
L e v e l
ts In te rn a l A L C
u lt M o d e )
ts E x te rn a l A L C
n a l D e te c to r In p u t
ts E x te rn a l A L C
r M e te r In p u t
ts F ix e d G a in ( A L C O ff)
S e le c ts A u to F ix e d G a in
(A L C O ff)
T u r n S lo p e A d ju s t O n /O ff
E d it th e S lo p e A d ju s t
E d it th e S lo p e P iv o t P o in t
E d it C u
D e c o u p
F ro m T
P re s s T
A tte n u a
P re s s T
A tte n u a
rre
le
h e
o
tio
o
tio
n t P o w e r
T h e A tte n
A L C
In c re a s e
n (1 0 d B S
D e c re a s e
n (1 0 d B S
L e v e l
u a to r
te p s )
te p s )
E d it th e S ta r t F r e q u e n c y
E d it th e F r e q u e n c y S c a lin g F a c to r
E d it th e S to p F r e q u e n c y
E d it th e F r e q u e n c y O ffs e t V a lu e
E d it th e N u m b e r O f P o in ts
S e le c te d O ffs e t T a b le O n /O ff
S ta r ts C a lib r a tio n T o C r e a te
O ffs e t T a b le
Figure 4-10. Leveling Modes Menu Map
4-14
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-63, for
leveling modes operating instructions.
MG369XB OM
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
AMPLITUDE MODULATION
MODE
Modulation
Internal AM
AM On/Off
Edit AM Depth
Edit AM Rate
Select External AM Source
Select Log AM (0 to 25 dB/V) or
Linear AM (0 to 100%/V)
AM On/Off
Edit AM Sensitivity
External AM
Select Internal AM Source
Select Log AM (0 to 25 dB/V) or
Linear AM (0 to 100%/V)
Select Modulation Waveform
Note: Use the keypad cursor
keys to highlight the
waveforms.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-93,
for amplitude modulation operating instructions.
Figure 4-11. Amplitude Modulation Menu Map
MG369XB OM
4-15
FREQUENCY MODULATION
MODE
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
Modulation
FM On/Off
Edit FM Deviation
Edit FM Rate
Internal FM
Select Modulation Waveform
Note: Use the keypad cursor
keys to highlight the
waveforms.
Select External FM Source
Select Locked Low-Noise FM Mode
Select Locked FM Mode
Select Unlocked Narrow FM Mode
Select Unlocked Wide FM Mode
FM On/Off
Edit FM Sensitivity
External FM
Select Internal FM Source
Select Locked Low-Noise FM Mode
Select Locked FM Mode
Select Unlocked Narrow FM Mode
Select Unlocked Wide FM Mode
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-96,
for frequency modulation operating instructions.
Figure 4-12. Frequency Modulation Menu Map
4-16
MG369XB OM
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
PHASE MODULATION
MODE
Modulation
Internal FM
FM On/Off
Edit FM Deviation
Edit FM Rate
Select External FM Source
Select Modulation Waveform
Note: Use the keypad cursor
keys to highlight the
waveforms.
Select Narrow FM Mode
Select Wide FM Mode
FM On/Off
Edit FM Sensitivity
External FM
Select Narrow FM Mode
Select Wide FM Mode
Select Internal FM Source
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-101,
for phase modulation operating instructions.
Figure 4-13. Phase Modulation Menu Map
MG369XB OM
4-17
PULSE MODULATION
MODE
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
Edit Selected Pulse
Width or Delay
Modulation
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-106,
for pulse modulation operating instructions.
Pulse Modulation On/Off
Edit PRF
Internal Pulse Modulation
*
Select External Pulse Source
Note: Use the keypad cursor
keys to highlight the
fields.
* The Step Delay Menu is only available
when Delayed or Triggered with Delay
triggering modes are selected.
Turn Step Delay On/Off
Set Step Delay Start Time
Set Step Delay Stop Time
Set Step Delay Step Size
Set Step Delay Time
** 100 MHz pulse clock rates are available
with Option 26; 40 MHz pulse clock rates
are available with Option 24.
Select Pulse Modulation Mode
Select PRF or Period
Select Low Level Trigger or
High Level Trigger
Select 100 MHz or 10 MHz
Pulse Generator Clock**
External Pulse Modulation
Note: Use the keypad cursor
keys to highlight the
pulse mode.
Select Pulse Modulation Trigger Mode
Set Positive Edge Trigger
Set Negative Edge Trigger
Note: Use the keypad cursor
keys to highlight the
trigger mode.
Pulse Modulation On/Off
Select Internal Pulse Source
Select Low Level Trigger or
High Level Trigger
Figure 4-14. Pulse Modulation Menu Map
4-18
MG369XB OM
LOCAL OPERATION
–MENU MAPS
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
In c r e a s e s D is p la y C o n tr a s t
S y s te m
D e c r e a s e s D is p la y C o n tr a s t
S e t R e fe r e n c e L o o p B a n d w id th to 1 0 H z
S e t R e fe r e n c e L o o p B a n d w id th to 3 0 H z
S e le
a n d
S e le
fo r V
S e le
P e n
S e
S e
S w
S e
o f
S e
c t + 5
B a n d
c t + 5
id e o
c t N o
L ift R
le c t R
le c t R
itc h in
le c t R
S w e e
le c t R
V o r -5
s w itc h
V o r -5
M a rk e
r m a lly
e la y C
F O
F O
g In
e s t
p R
F O
V L e v e l fo r R e tra c e
B la n k in g
V le v e l
rs
O p e n o r C lo s e d
o n ta c ts
n o r O ff D u r in g
n o r O ff D u r in g
C W , S te p , a n d
F o r S in g le S w e
a m p , 1 0 F o r T o
n o r O ff a t R e s
S e t R e fe r e n c e L o o p B a n d w id th to 1 0 0 H z
S e t R e fe r e n c e L o o p B a n d w id th to 3 0 0 H z
R e tra c e
F re q u e n c y
L is t M o d e s
e p , 0 F o r B o tto m
p o f S w e e p R a m p
e t
S e t R e
S e le c t
W h e n
W ith O
fe re n c
4 0 d B
R F S w
p tio n 2
e M
o r 0
itc h
O n
u ltip lie r
d B A tte n u a tio n
e d O ff ( U n its
ly )
S e le c t G P IB A d d r e s s
S e t G P IB A d d re s s
8 0 0 3 S c a la r M o d e O n /O ff
S e le c t C R o r C R /L F L in e T e r m in a to r
S e le c t P
5 6 2 /5 6 1
M o d e O
( O p tio n
S e t R e m
D is p la y
H P 8 7 5 7 D S c a la r M o d e O n /O ff
S e le c t G P IB L a n g u a g e
*
o w e r M e te r T y p e
0 0 A S c a la r
n /O ff
1 3 O n ly )
o te O p e r a tio n
M o d e
H P 8 7 5 7 E S c a la r M o d e O n /O ff
In c re m e n t M o d e O n /O ff
S e t F re q u e n c y In c re m e n t
S e t P o w e r L e v e l In c re m e n t
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, page 3-76,
for system configuration operating instructions.
S e t T im e In c r e m e n t
Figure 4-15. System Configuration Menu Map
MG369XB OM
4-19/4-20
Chapter 5
Operation Verification
Table of Contents
5-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-3
Test Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-4
Initial MG369XB Checkout . . .
Power Up . . . . . . . . .
Self-Test . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the MG369XB . .
Warmup Time . . . . . . .
5-5
Frequency Synthesis Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-6
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests. . . . . . . .
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Level Accuracy Test Procedure . . .
Power Level Flatness Test Procedure . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-12
NOTE
Specifications shown in this chapter and in other chapters are for reference only.
Refer to the performance specifications for the MG369XB in the technical data
sheet, part number 11410-00344, located in the back of this manual.
5-2
MG369XB OM
Chapter 5
Operation Verification
5-1
Introduction
This chapter contains three operation verification tests that can be
used to verify Series MG369XB Synthesized signal generator operation.
Setup instructions and performance procedures are included for each
test. The results can be compared with the specified limits that are
shown on the test record forms that are provided for each test.
5-2
Test Equipment
Table 5-1 lists the recommended test equipment for performing the operation verification tests in this chapter.
Table 5-1.
Recommended Test Equipment
Instrument
Frequency
Counter
Recommended
Manufacturer/Model
Range: 0.01 to 40 GHz
Input Z: 50W
Resolution: 1 Hz
Other: External Time Base
Input
Anritsu Model MF2414B
Frequency
Counter,
with
Cable Kit
and
External Mixer
Range: 0.01 to 65 GHz
Input Z: 50W
Resolution: 1 Hz
Other: External Time Base
Input
EIP Microwave, Inc. Models 538B,
548B, or 578B,
with
Cable Kit: Option 590 and
External Mixer:
Option 91 (26.5 to 40 GHz)
Option 92 (40 to 60 GHz)
Option 93 (60 to 90 GHz)
Power Meter,
with
Power
Sensor
Range: –30 to +20 dBm
(1mW to 100 mW)
Anritsu Models ML2437A or
ML2438A,
with
Power Sensor:
MA2474A (0.01 to 40 GHz)
MA2575A (0.01 to 50 GHz)
Oscilloscope
Bandwidth: DC to 150 MHz
Vertical Sensitivity: 2 mV/
division
Horizontal Sensitivity: 50 ns/
division
Tektronix, Inc. Model TAS485
or
MG369XB OM
Critical Specification
5-3
Initial MG369XB Checkout
Operation Verification
5-3
Test Records
Tables 5-2 and 5-3 contain test record forms that can be photocopied
and used to record the results of operational verification testing of
your MG369XB. These tables are included as part of the operational
verification test procedures and contain test information for all
MG369XB models.
5-4
Initial MG369XB
Checkout
Before starting the operation verification tests in this chapter, perform
an initial checkout of the MG369XB to be tested. This initial checkout
consists of applying power to the signal generator, verifying that it
passes self-test, and resetting it to the factory default parameters.
Power Up
Connect the MG369XB to the power source and turn
on the rear panel power switch. This automatically
places the signal generator in operation (front panel
OPERATE LED on).
During power up, the signal generator loads its operating program then returns to the exact setup it
was in when last turned off.
Self-Test
Next, perform a self-test of the MG369XB to insure
proper operation of the instrument PCBs and other
internal assemblies.
To self-test the signal generator, press System .
Then, press the System Menu soft-key Selftest .
When the self-test is complete, the instrument displays the main CW menu.
NOTE
Error conditions detected during self-test are
displayed as error messages on the data display.
They should be corrected before continuing.
Refer to Chapter 6 for a listing of error messages and descriptions.
Resetting the
MG369XB
The signal generator should be reset to the factory-selected default parameters before commencing
operation verification testing.
To reset the MG369XB, first press System , then
press Reset . The signal generator resets to the CW
frequency mode and displays the CW Menu.
Warmup Time
5-4
When the signal generator is turned on, allow one
hour of warmup time before performing operational
verification testing. This will assure stable operation
of the instrument.
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
5-5
Frequency Synthesis
Test
Frequency Synthesis Test
The following test verifies that the CW frequency output of the
MG369XB is within tolerance. Table 5-2, pages 5-7 through 5-9, contains standard test records that you can copy and use to record test results for this test.
M G 3 6 9 X B
F re q u e n c y C o u n te r
1 0 M H z
R E F O U T
1 0 M H z
E X T IN
In p u t 1
R F O U T
Figure 5-1.
Equipment Setup for Frequency Synthesis Test
Test Setup
Test
Procedure
Connect the equipment, shown in Figure 5-1, as follows:
Step 1.
Connect the MG369XB rear panel 10 MHz
REF OUT to the Frequency Counter
10 MHz External Reference input.
Step 2.
Connect the MG369XB RF OUTPUT to
the Frequency Counter RF Input 1.
The following procedure tests both the coarse and
fine loops to verify the tolerance of the CW frequency output.
Step 1.
Set up the MG369XB as follows:
a. Reset the instrument by pressing
System , then Reset . Upon reset, the
CW Menu is displayed (following
page).
MG369XB OM
5-5
Frequency Synthesis Test
Operation Verification
b. Press Edit F1 to open the current frequency parameter for editing.
c. Set F1 to the first test frequency for
the model being tested.
Step 2.
Verify that the Frequency Counter reading meets specifications.
Step 3.
Record the Frequency Counter reading on
the test record.
NOTE
The Frequency Counter reading is
typically within ±1 Hz. Differences of
a few Hertz can be caused by noise or
counter limitations. Differences of
³±10 Hz indicate a frequency synthesis problem.
5-6
Step 4.
Set F1 to the next test frequency on the
test record and record the Frequency
Counter reading.
Step 5.
Repeat Step 4 until all frequencies listed
on the test record have been recorded.
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-2.
Frequency Synthesis Test
Frequency Synthesis Test Record (1 of 3)
Model MG369 _ B
Serial No. ____________________
MG3691B
Date ___________
MG3692B
2.000 000 000 00*
_____________________
2.000 000 000 00*
_____________________
5.000 000 000 00
_____________________
5.000 000 000 00
_____________________
8.000 000 000 00
_____________________
8.000 000 000 00
_____________________
8.400 000 000 00
_____________________
11.000 000 000 00
_____________________
14.000 000 000 00
_____________________
17.000 000 000 00
_____________________
20.000 000 000 00
_____________________
2.000 000 100 00
_____________________
2.000 000 100 00
_____________________
2.000 000 200 00
_____________________
2.000 000 200 00
_____________________
2.000 000 300 00
_____________________
2.000 000 300 00
_____________________
2.000 000 400 00
_____________________
2.000 000 400 00
_____________________
2.000 000 500 00
_____________________
2.000 000 500 00
_____________________
2.000 000 600 00
_____________________
2.000 000 600 00
_____________________
2.000 000 700 00
_____________________
2.000 000 700 00
_____________________
2.000 000 800 00
_____________________
2.000 000 800 00
_____________________
2.000 000 900 00
_____________________
2.000 000 900 00
_____________________
2.000 001 000 00
_____________________
2.000 001 000 00
_____________________
* Tolerance for all frequencies listed above is ±10 Hz. All frequencies are in GHz.
MG369XB OM
5-7
Frequency Synthesis Test
Table 5-2.
Operation Verification
Frequency Synthesis Test Record (2 of 3)
Model MG369 _ B
Serial No. ____________________
MG3693B
Date ___________
MG3694B
2.000 000 000 00*
_____________________
2.000 000 000 00*
_____________________
5.000 000 000 00
_____________________
5.000 000 000 00
_____________________
8.000 000 000 00
_____________________
8.000 000 000 00
_____________________
11.000 000 000 00
_____________________
11.000 000 000 00
_____________________
14.000 000 000 00
_____________________
14.000 000 000 00
_____________________
17.000 000 000 00
_____________________
17.000 000 000 00
_____________________
20.000 000 000 00
_____________________
20.000 000 000 00
_____________________
23.000 000 000 00
_____________________
23.000 000 000 00
_____________________
26.000 000 000 00
_____________________
26.000 000 000 00
_____________________
29.000 000 000 00
_____________________
29.000 000 000 00
_____________________
30.000 000 000 00
_____________________
32.000 000 000 00
_____________________
35.000 000 000 00
_____________________
38.000 000 000 00
_____________________
40.000 000 000 00
_____________________
2.000 000 100 00
_____________________
2.000 000 100 00
_____________________
2.000 000 200 00
_____________________
2.000 000 200 00
_____________________
2.000 000 300 00
_____________________
2.000 000 300 00
_____________________
2.000 000 400 00
_____________________
2.000 000 400 00
_____________________
2.000 000 500 00
_____________________
2.000 000 500 00
_____________________
2.000 000 600 00
_____________________
2.000 000 600 00
_____________________
2.000 000 700 00
_____________________
2.000 000 700 00
_____________________
2.000 000 800 00
_____________________
2.000 000 800 00
_____________________
2.000 000 900 00
_____________________
2.000 000 900 00
_____________________
2.000 001 000 00
_____________________
2.000 001 000 00
_____________________
* Tolerance for all frequencies listed above is ±10 Hz. All frequencies are in GHz.
5-8
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-2.
Frequency Synthesis Test
Frequency Synthesis Test Record (3 of 3)
Model MG369 _ B
Serial No. ____________________
MG3695B
Date ___________
MG3696B
2.000 000 000 00*
_____________________
2.000 000 000 00*
_____________________
5.000 000 000 00
_____________________
5.000 000 000 00
_____________________
8.000 000 000 00
_____________________
8.000 000 000 00
_____________________
11.000 000 000 00
_____________________
11.000 000 000 00
_____________________
14.000 000 000 00
_____________________
14.000 000 000 00
_____________________
17.000 000 000 00
_____________________
17.000 000 000 00
_____________________
20.000 000 000 00
_____________________
20.000 000 000 00
_____________________
23.000 000 000 00
_____________________
23.000 000 000 00
_____________________
26.000 000 000 00
_____________________
26.000 000 000 00
_____________________
29.000 000 000 00
_____________________
29.000 000 000 00
_____________________
32.000 000 000 00
_____________________
32.000 000 000 00
_____________________
35.000 000 000 00
_____________________
35.000 000 000 00
_____________________
38.000 000 000 00
_____________________
38.000 000 000 00
_____________________
40.000 000 000 00
_____________________
40.000 000 000 00
_____________________
50.000 000 000 00
_____________________
65.000 000 000 00
_____________________
2.000 000 100 00
_____________________
2.000 000 100 00
_____________________
2.000 000 200 00
_____________________
2.000 000 200 00
_____________________
2.000 000 300 00
_____________________
2.000 000 300 00
_____________________
2.000 000 400 00
_____________________
2.000 000 400 00
_____________________
2.000 000 500 00
_____________________
2.000 000 500 00
_____________________
2.000 000 600 00
_____________________
2.000 000 600 00
_____________________
2.000 000 700 00
_____________________
2.000 000 700 00
_____________________
2.000 000 800 00
_____________________
2.000 000 800 00
_____________________
2.000 000 900 00
_____________________
2.000 000 900 00
_____________________
2.000 001 000 00
_____________________
2.000 001 000 00
_____________________
* Tolerance for all frequencies listed above is ±10 Hz. All frequencies are in GHz.
MG369XB OM
5-9
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
5-6
Level Accuracy and
Flatness Tests
Operation Verification
These tests verify that the power level accuracy and flatness of the
MG369XB meet specifications. Table 5-3, pages through , contains test
records that you can copy and use to record test results for these tests.
Test records are provided for each MG369XB model configuration.
M G 3 6 9 X B S ig n a l G e n e r a to r
O s c illo s c o p e
H O R IZ
O U T
C H
R F O u tp u t
P o w e r M e te r
P o w e r
S e n s o r
Figure 5-2.
1 o r X In p u t
Equipment Setup for Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Test Setup
Connect the equipment, shown in Figure 5-2, as follows:
Step 1.
Calibrate the power meter with the power
sensor.
Step 2.
Connect the power sensor to the RF Output of the MG369XB.
Step 3.
Connect the MG369XB rear panel HORIZ
OUT to the oscilloscope channel one input
(X input).
NOTE
Before starting these procedures, locate the test record in Table 5-3 for
the particular MG369XB model configuration being tested.
5-10
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level
Accuracy Test
Procedure
Power level accuracy is checked by stepping the
power down in one dB increments from its maximum rated power level.
Step 1.
Set up the MG369XB as follows:
a. Reset the instrument by pressing
System , then Reset . The CW menu
is displayed.
b. Press Edit F1 to open the current frequency parameter for editing.
c. Set F1 to the CW frequency noted on
the test record for the model being
tested.
d. Press Edit L1 to open the current
power level parameter for editing.
NOTE
The power level accuracy test
records are generic to all models
and option configurations. Not all
of the power level settings may
apply to your specific model
configuration. Start with the
highest specified power level as
indicat ed in the technical
datasheet from Appendix B
located at the back of this manual.
MG369XB OM
e. Set L1 to the maximumspecified
power level noted in the datasheet.
Step 2.
Measure the output power level with the
power meter and record the reading on
the test record.
Step 3.
Verify that the reading meets the
specifications listed on the test record.
Step 4.
Set L1 to the next test power level. Record the power meter reading on the test
record and verify that it meets
specification.
Step 5.
Repeat Step 4 for the other power levels
listed on the test record for the current
CW frequency.
Step 6.
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for all CW frequencies listed on the test record.
5-11
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level
Flatness Test
Procedure
Operation Verification
Power level flatness is checked by measuring the
power level variation during a full band sweep; first
in the step sweep mode, then in the analog sweep
mode.
Step 1.
Set up the MG369XB as follows for a step
sweep power level flatness test:
a. Reset the instrument by pressing
System , then Reset . The CW menu
is displayed.
b. Press Step Sweep to place the unit in
the step sweep frequency mode and
display the Step Sweep menu (below).
c. With the Step Sweep menu displayed,
press the Frequency Control > softkey. The Sweep Frequency Control
menu, shown below, is displayed.
d. Press Full to select a full range frequency sweep.
e. Press Edit L1 to open the current
power level parameter for editing.
f. Set L1 to the power level noted on the
test record.
5-12
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
g. Now, return to the Step Sweep menu
by pressing the < Previous soft-key.
h. At the Step Sweep menu, press
Dwell Time to open the dwell-timeper-step parameter for editing.
i. Set the dwell time to 1 second.
NOTE
Monitor the MG369XB's horizontal
output on the oscilloscope to determine sweep start and stop.
Step 2.
MG369XB OM
As the MG369XB steps through the full
frequency range, measure the maximum
and minimum power meter readings and
record the values on the test record. Verify that the variation (difference between
the maximum and minimum readings)
does not exceed the value noted on the
test record.
5-13
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Operation Verification
Step 3.
Set up the MG369XB as follows for an analog sweep power level flatness test:
a. Reset the instrument by pressing
SYSTEM , then Reset . The CW menu
is displayed.
b. Press Analog Sweep to place the
MG369XB in the analog sweep frequency mode and display the Analog
Sweep menu (below).
c. With the Analog Sweep menu displayed, press Frequency Control > .
The Sweep Frequency Control menu
(below) is displayed.
d. Press Full to select a full range frequency sweep.
e. Press Edit L1 to open the current
power level parameter for editing.
f. Set L1 to the power level noted on the
test record.
g. Now, return to the Analog Sweep
menu by pressing < Previous .
h. At the Analog Sweep menu, press the
menu soft-key Sweep Time to open
the sweep time parameter for editing.
5-14
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
i. Set the sweep time to 99 seconds.
NOTE
Monitor the MG369XB’s horizontal
output on the oscilloscope to determine sweep start and stop.
Step 4.
MG369XB OM
During the analog sweep, measure the
maximum and minimum power meter
readings and record the values on the test
record. Verify that the variation (difference between the maximum and minimum readings) does not exceed the value
noted on the test record.
5-15
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3691B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+19 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
5-16
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3691B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-17
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3692B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 15.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+19 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
5-18
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3692B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-19
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3693B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 15.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+15 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
5-20
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3693B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-21
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3694B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 15.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+15 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
5-22
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3694B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-23
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3695B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 50.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+12 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
5-24
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3695B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-25
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3696B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 50.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+12 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
5-26
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3696B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
Standard Power Units with Options:__________________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-27
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3691B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+19 dBm
______dBm
+25 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+24 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+23 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+22 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+21 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+20 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
5-28
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3691B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-29
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3692B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 15.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+19 dBm
______dBm
+23 dBm
______dBm
+23 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+22 dBm
______dBm
+22 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+21 dBm
______dBm
+21 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+20 dBm
______dBm
+20 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
5-30
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3692B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-31
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3693B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 15.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+17 dBm
______dBm
+23 dBm
______dBm
+23 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+22 dBm
______dBm
+22 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+21 dBm
______dBm
+21 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+20 dBm
______dBm
+20 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
5-32
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3693B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-33
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3694B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 15.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+17 dBm
______dBm
+23 dBm
______dBm
+23 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+22 dBm
______dBm
+22 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+21 dBm
______dBm
+21 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+20 dBm
______dBm
+20 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
5-34
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
* Specification: ±1.0 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3694B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-35
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3695B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 50.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+16 dBm
______dBm
+23 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+22 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+21 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+20 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
5-36
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3695B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-37
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Table 5-3.
Operation Verification
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 2)
Model MG3696B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 500 MHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Power Level Accuracy*
Power Level Accuracy*
(CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 50.0 GHz)
Set
Power
Measured
Power
Set
Power
Measured
Power
+16 dBm
______dBm
+21 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+20 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+19 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+18 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+17 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+16 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+15 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+14 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+13 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+12 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+11 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+10 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+9 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+8 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+7 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
+6 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
+5 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
+4 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
+3 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
+2 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
+1 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
+0 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–1 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–2 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–3 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
–4 dBm
______dBm
–5 dBm
______dBm
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
5-38
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
* Specification: ±1.5 dB
MG369XB OM
Operation Verification
Table 5-3.
Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 2)
Model MG3696B
Serial No. ____________________
Date ___________
High Power (Option 15) Units with Options:____________________________________________________________
Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation **
_________dB
** Maximum variation is 2.2 dB
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)
Set Power
+ 0 dBm
Max Power
_________dBm
Min Power
__________dBm
Variation ***
_________dB
*** Maximum variation is 5 dB (typical)
MG369XB OM
5-39/5-40
Chapter 6
Operator Maintenance
Table of Contents
6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2
Error and Warning/Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Self-Test Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Normal Operation Error and Warning/Status Messages . . . . 6-8
6-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-4
Routine Maintenance . . . . . .
Cleaning the Fan Filters. .
Cleaning the Data Display.
Replacing the Line Fuses .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-14
Chapter 6
Operator Maintenance
6-1
Introduction
This chapter provides the information necessary for operator maintenance of the signal generator. Operator maintenance is limited to troubleshooting and repairs that can be made without removing the
instrument covers.
6-2
Error and
Warning/Status
Messages
During normal operation, the MG369XB generates error messages to
indicate internal malfunctions, abnormal signal generator operations,
or invalid signal inputs or data entries. It also displays warning messages to alert you of conditions that could result in inaccurate signal
generator output. In addition, status messages are displayed to remind
you of current menu selections or settings.
Self-Test Error The MG369XB firmware includes internal diagnostics that self-test the instrument. These self-test diMessages
agnostics perform a brief go/no-go test of most of the
instrument PCBs and other internal assemblies.
CAUTION
During self-test with RF OUTPUT set to ON, the output
power level is set to 0 dBm. Always disconnect sensitive
equipment from the unit before performing self-test.
You can perform a signal generator self-test at any
time during normal operation by pressing System
and then the System Menu soft-key Selftest .
If the signal generator fails self-test, an error message(s) is displayed on the front panel data display.
These error messages describe the malfunction and,
in most cases, provide an indication of what has
failed. Table 6-1, pages 6-4 through 6-6, is a summary listing of the self-test error messages. Included
for each is a description of the probable cause(s),
whether or not the MG369XB is still operable, and if
operable, what operational degradation can be expected.
MG369XB OM
6-3
Error and Warning/Status Messages
Operator Maintenance
WARNING
Self-test error messages normally indicate the failure of an
internal component or assembly of the signal generator.
There are no operator serviceable components inside. Refer
servicing of the instrument to qualified service technicians.
To prevent the risk of electrical shock or damage to precision components, do not remove the equipment covers.
Table 6-1.
Self-Test Error Messages (1 of 4)
Error Message
Description/Remarks
Error 100
DVM Ground Offset Failed
Indicates that a calibration-related problem. Do Not Attempt to Operate! Refer the
instrument to a qualified service technician.
Error 101
DVM Positive 10V Reference
Indicates that either a calibration-related problem or a defective +10 Volt reference.
Do Not Attempt to Operate! Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician.
Error 102
DVM Negative 10V Reference
Indicates that either a calibration-related problem or a defective –10 Volt reference .
Do Not Attempt to Operate! Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician.
Error 107
Sweep Time Check Failed
Indicates that the sweep timing is out of tolerance or has failed. If analog sweeps
can be obtained, the MG369XB is still operable in a degraded mode. If analog
sweeps can not be obtained, the MG369XB is operable only in CW or step sweep
frequency modes.
Error 108
Crystal Oven Cold
Indicates that the 100 MHz crystal oven, or the Option 16 high-stability 10 MHz
crystal oscillator, has not reached operating temperature. The MG369XB is still operable, but frequency accuracy and stability may be degraded.
Error 109
The 100MHz Reference is not
Locked to the External
Reference
Indicates that the reference loop is not phase-locked to the external 10 MHz reference. The reference loop may phase-lock to the internal 100 MHz time base; consequently, the MG369XB would continue to operate normally.
Error 110
The 100MHz Reference is not
Locked to the High Stability
10MHz Crystal Oscillator
Indicates that the reference loop is not phase-locked to the optional, high stability
10 MHz crystal oscillator. The reference loop may phase-lock to the internal
100 MHz time base; consequently, the MG369XB will continue to operate normally.
Error 112
Coarse Loop Osc Failed
Indicates that the coarse loop B oscillator is not phase-locked. The MG369XB is still
operable, but the accuracy and stability of the frequency outputs are greatly reduced.
Error 113
YIG Loop Osc Failed
Indicates that the YIG loop is not phase-locked. The MG369XB is still operable, but
the accuracy and stability of the frequency outputs are greatly reduced.
Error 114
Down Converter LO not Locked
Indicates that the local oscillator in the down converter assembly is not
phase-locked. The MG369XB is still operable, but the accuracy and stability of frequency outputs below 2 GHz is greatly reduced.
6-4
MG369XB OM
Operator Maintenance
Table 6-1.
Error and Warning/Status Messages
Self-Test Error Messages (2 of 4)
Error Message
Description/Remarks
Error 115
Not Locked Indicator Failed
Indicates a failure of the phase-locked indicator circuit. The MG369XB is still operable, but an error message will not appear on the data display when the output frequency is not phase-locked.
Error 116
FM Loop Gain Check Failed
Indicates that the FM loop has failed or the loop gain is out of tolerance. The
MG369XB is still operable, but the frequency accuracy and stability are degraded.
Error 117
Linearizer Check Failed
Indicates a failure of the linearizer DAC on the A5 PCB. The MG369XB is still operable, but the frequency accuracy of the RF output is degraded.
Error 118
Switch point DAC Failed
Indicates a failure of the switch point DAC. The MG369XB is still operable, but will
not generate a CW Ramp.
Error 119
Center Frequency Circuits
Failed
Indicates a failure of the center frequency circuitry. Do Not Attempt to Operate!
Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician.
Error 120
Delta-F Circuits Failed
Indicates a failure of the DF width DAC on the A5 PCB. The MG369XB will not generate DF analog sweeps, but should produce DF step sweeps.
Error 121
Unleveled Indicator Failed
Indicates a failure of the leveled detector circuitry. The MG369XB is still operable,
but a warning message will not appear when the RF output is unleveled.
Error 122
Level Reference Failed
Indicates a failure of the level reference circuitry. Use caution and always determine
the output power level when operating the MG369XB in this condition.
Error 123
Detector Log Amp Failed
Indicates a failure of the level detector log amplifier circuitry. Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the MG369XB in this condition.
Error 124
Full Band Unlocked and Unleveled
Indicates a failure of both YIG-tuned oscillators. Do Not Attempt to Operate! Refer
the instrument to a qualified service technician.
Error 125
8.4 – 20 GHz Unlocked and
Unleveled
Indicates a failure of the 8.4 to 20 GHz YIG-tuned oscillator. Do Not Attempt to
Operate! Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician.
Error 126
2 – 8.4 GHz Unlocked and
Unleveled
Indicates a failure of the 2 to 8.4 GHz YIG-tuned oscillator. Do Not Attempt to Operate! Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician.
Error 127
Detector Input Circuit
Failed
Indicates a failure of the level detector input circuitry. Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the MG369XB in this condition.
Error 128
.01 – 2 GHz Unleveled
Indicates a failure of the down converter leveling circuitry. The MG369XB operates
normally but will have unleveled RF output in the 0.01 to 2 GHz frequency range.
Error 129
Switched Filter or Level
Detector Failed
Indicates a failure of either the switched filter or level detector circuitry. The
MG369XB may not produce an RF output. Use caution and always determine the
output power level when operating the MG369XB in this condition.
MG369XB OM
6-5
Error and Warning/Status Messages
Table 6-1.
Operator Maintenance
Self-Test Error Messages (3 of 4)
Error Message
Description/Remarks
Error 130
2 – 3.3 GH Switched Filter
Indicates a failure in the 2 to 3.3 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter
assembly. The MG369XB may not produce an RF output in this frequency range.
Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the
MG369XB in this condition.
Error 131
3.3 – 5.5 GH Switched Filter
Indicates a failure in the 3.3 to 5.5 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter
assembly. The MG369XB may not produce an RF output in this frequency range.
Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the
MG369XB in this condition.
Error 132
5.5 – 8.4 GH Switched Filter
Indicates a failure in the 5.5 to 8.4 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter
assembly. The MG369XB may not produce an RF output in this frequency range.
Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the
MG369XB in this condition.
Error 133
8.4 – 13.25 GH Switched Filter
Indicates a failure in the 8.4 to 13.25 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter assembly. The MG369XB may not produce an RF output in this frequency
range. Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating
the MG369XB in this condition.
Error 134
13.25 – 20 GH Switched Filter
Indicates a failure in the 13.25 to 20 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter assembly. The MG369XB may not produce an RF output in this frequency
range. Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating
the MG369XB in this condition.
Error 135
Modulator or Driver Failed
Indicates a failure of the modulator in the switched filter assembly or the modulator
driver circuitry. The MG369XB may not produce an RF output. Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the MG369XB in this condition.
Error 136
SQM Unit or Driver Failed
Indicates a failure of the source quadrupler module (SQM) or SQM bias regulator
circuitry. The MG369XB is still operable, but it may not produce an RF output in the
frequency range above 40 GHz.
Error 138
SDM Unit or Driver Failed
Indicates a failure of the switched doubler module (SDM) or SDM bias regulator circuitry. The MG369XB is still operable, but it may not produce an RF output in the 20
to 40 GHz frequency range.
Error 139
32 – 40 GHz SDM Section Failed
Indicates a failure in the 32 to 40 GHz switched doubler filter path within the SDM.
The MG369XB is still operable, but it will not produce an RF output in the 32 to
40 GHz frequency range.
Error 140
25 – 32 GHz SDM Section Failed
Indicates a failure in the 25 to 32 GHz switched doubler filter path within the SDM.
The MG369XB is still operable, but it will not produce an RF output in the 25 to
32 GHz frequency range.
Error 141
20 – 25 GHz SDM Section Failed
Indicates a failure in the 20 to 25 GHz switched doubler filter path within the SDM.
The MG369XB is still operable, but it will not produce an RF output in the 20 to
25 GHz frequency range.
6-6
MG369XB OM
Operator Maintenance
Table 6-1.
Error and Warning/Status Messages
Self-Test Error Messages (4 of 4)
Error Message
Description/Remarks
Error 142
Sample and Hold Circuit
Failed
Indicates a failure of the sample and hold circuitry on the A6 PCB`. The MG369XB
still operates normally, but the RF output may be unleveled during pulse modulation.
Error 143
Slope DAC Failed
Indicates a failure of the level slope DAC on the A6 PCB. The MG369XB still operates normally, but RF output level flatness may be affected during frequency
sweeps.
Error 144
RF was Off when Self-test
started. Some tests were
not performed.
Indicates that some self-tests were not performed because RF output was selected
OFF on the MG369XB front panel. Press the OUTPUT key to turn RF Output ON
and run the instrument self-test again.
Error 145
AM meter or associated
circuitry failed
Indicates a failure of the internal AM circuitry and loss of the capability to provide
amplitude modulation of the RF output signal using modulating signals from the internal AM generator. The MG369XB may not provide amplitude modulation of the
output signal using modulating signals from an external source.
Error 147
Internal FM circuitry failed
Indicates a failure of the internal FM circuitry and loss of the capability to provide
frequency modulation of the RF output signal using modulating signals from the internal FM generator. The MG369XB may not provide frequency modulation of the
output signal using modulating signals from an external source.
Error 148
Pulse 100 MHz reference
circuitry failed
Indicates a failure of the pulse generator 100 MHz oscillator circuitry. The pulse
generator may still function; however, the 100 MHz oscillator is not phase locked to
the 10 MHz reference time base. The pulse modulation function may not operate.
or
Error 148
Pulse 40 MHz reference
circuitry failed
MG369XB OM
Indicates a failure of the pulse generator 40 MHz oscillator circuitry. The pulse
generator may still function; however, the 40 MHz oscillator is not phase locked to
the 10 MHz reference time base. The pulse modulation function may not operate.
6-7
Error and Warning/Status Messages
Operator Maintenance
Normal
Operation
Error and
Warning/Status
Messages
When an abnormal condition is detected during operation, the MG369XB displays an error message to
indicate that the output is abnormal or that a signal
input or data entry is invalid. It also displays warning messages to alert you of conditions that could
cause an inaccurate signal generator output. Status
messages to remind you of current menu selections
or settings are also generated.
Table 6-2 is a summary list of possible error messages that can be displayed during normal operations. Table 6-3 is a summary list of possible
warning/status messages.
Table 6-2.
Possible Error Messages during Normal Operation (1 of 2)
Error Message
ERROR
Displayed on the frequency mode title bar when the output frequency is not phase-locked, an invalid frequency
parameter entry causes a frequency range error, or an
invalid pulse parameter entry causes a pulse modulation
error.
LOCK ERROR
Displayed in the frequency parameters area when the
output frequency is not phase-locked. The frequency accuracy and stability of the RF output is greatly reduced.
This is normally caused by an internal component failure.
Run self-test to verify the malfunction.
RANGE
Displayed in the frequency parameters area when the dF
value entered results in a sweep outside the range of the
instrument, the step size value entered is greater than
the sweep range, the number of steps entered results in
a step size of less than 0.01 Hz or 0.01 dB (0.001 mV in
linear mode), the step sweep time entered divided by the
number of steps entered results in a dwell time of
<10 ms, or when the analog sweep start frequency entered is greater than the stop frequency. Entering valid
values usually clears the error.
SLAVE
Displayed in the frequency parameters area of the Master MG369XB during master-slave operation in VNA
mode when the slave frequency offset value entered results in a CW frequency or frequency sweep outside the
range of the slave MG369XB. Entering a valid offset
value clears the error.
ERR
6-8
Description
Displayed in the modulation status area when one or
more of the following error conditions occurs:
(1) The external AM modulating signal exceeds the input
voltage range. In addition, the message “Reduce AM Input Level” appears at the bottom of the AM status display. (Continued on next page)
MG369XB OM
Operator Maintenance
Error and Warning/Status Messages
Table 6-2.
Possible Error Messages during Normal Operation (2 of 2)
Error Message
ERR
MG369XB OM
Description
Continued:
(2) The external FM (or FM) modulating signal exceeds the
input voltage range. In addition, the message
“Reduce FM (or FM) Input Level” appears at the bottom of
the FM (or FM) status display.
(3) A pulse parameter setting is invalid for the current pulse
modulation state, as follows:
Pulse Period: <50 ns (100 MHz clock), <125 ns (40 MHz
clock), or <500 ns (10 MHz clock) longer than pulse widths
+ delays
Single Pulse Mode:
Free Run or Gated Trigger:
Width1 > PRI
Delayed Trigger:
Delay1 + Width1 > PRI
Doublet Pulse Mode:
Free Run Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or
Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) + Width2 > PRI
Delayed Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or
Delay1 + Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) +Width2 > PRI
External Trigger with or without Delay:
Width1 > Delay2
Triplet Pulse Mode:
Free Run Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3 or
Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) + Width2 +
(Delay3 – Width2) + Width 3 > PRI
Delayed Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3 or
Delay1 + Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) + Width2 +
(Delay3 – Width2) + Width 3 > PRI
External Trigger with or without Delay:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3
Quadruplet Pulse Mode:
Free Run Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3 or
Width3 > Delay4 or
Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) + Width2 + (Delay3 –
Width2) + Width3 + (Delay4 – Width3) + Width4
> PRI
Delayed Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3 or
Width3 > Delay4 or
Delay1 + Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) + Width2 +
(Delay3 – Width2) + Width3 + (Delay4 – Width3) +
Width4 > PRI
External Trigger with or without Delay:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3 or
Width3 > Delay4
6-9
Error and Warning/Status Messages
Table 6-3.
Operator Maintenance
Possible Warning/Status Messages during Normal Operations
Warning/Status
Message
6-10
Description
COLD
This warning message indicates that the 100 MHz
Crystal oven (or the 10 MHz Crystal oven if Option 16 is
installed) has not reached operating temperature.
Normally displayed during a cold start of the MG369XB.
If the message is displayed during normal operation, it
could indicate a malfunction. Run self-test to verify.
UNLEVELED
Displayed when the RF output goes unleveled.
Normally caused by exceeding the specified leveled-power rating. Reducing the power level usually
clears the warning message. If the warning message is
displayed only when AM is selected ON, the modulating
signal may be driving the RF output unleveled. Reducing the modulating signal or adjusting the power
level usually clears the warning.
UNLOCKED
When Unlocked/Narrow FM or Unlocked/Wide FM is
selected ON, this warning message appears indicating
that the instrument is not phase-locked during this FM
mode of operation.
REDUCE RATE
This warning message is displayed when the AM rate,
FM rate, or FM rate is set >100 kHz for a non-sine
wave modulating waveform. Amplitude, frequency, or
phase modulation of the output signal will continue but
the modulating waveform may be distorted.
SLOPE
This status message indicates that a power slope correction has been applied to the ALC.
EXTL REF
This status message indicates that an external 10 MHz
signal is being used as the reference signal for the
MG369XB.
OFFSET
This status message indicates that a constant (offset)
has been applied to the displayed power level.
CW RAMP
This status message appears on all CW menu displays
to indicate that the CW ramp has been turned on.
USER 1...5
This status message indicates that a user level flatness
correction power-offset table has been applied to the
ALC.
MG369XB OM
Operator Maintenance
6-3
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Table 6-4 provides procedures for troubleshooting common malfunctions encountered during operation of the signal generator. Included
are procedures for troubleshooting faults that do not produce error
messages, such as, failure to power up and unexpected shutdown.
Table 6-4.
Troubleshooting (1 of 3)
Signal Generator will not turn on
(OPERATE light is OFF)
Normal Operation: When the MG369XB is connected to the power
source and the rear panel power switch turned on, the OPERATE light
should illuminate and the instrument should power up.
Step 1.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Disconnect the MG369XB from the power source, then check
the line fuses on the rear panel.
q
If a fuse is defective, replace (see page 6-15)
q
If the fuses are good, go to the next step
Check to see if power is available at the power receptacle.
q
If not, move to a working receptacle
q
If power is available, go to the next step
Check the power cable
q
If defective, replace
q
If good, call a service technician
Signal Generator will not turn on
(OPERATE light is ON)
Normal Operation: When the MG369XB is connected to the power
source and the rear panel power switch turned on, the OPERATE light
should illuminate and the instrument should power up.
q
MG369XB OM
If the OPERATE light illuminates but the unit fails to
power up, the MG369XB has an internal component failure. Call a service technician.
6-11
Troubleshooting
Operator Maintenance
Table 6-4.
Troubleshooting (2 of 3)
Signal Generator Quits During Operation
(OPERATE light remains on)
Trouble Description: The signal generator operates for some time,
then shuts down (OPERATE light remains on). After a short period, the
signal generator resumes normal operation. This is an indication that
the MG369XB has reached an excessive operating temperature.
Step 1.
Check that the fan is still operating during the time that the
instrument is shut down.
q
If the fan is still operating, clean the air filter (see
page 6-14)
q
If the fan is not operating, call a service technician
LOCK ERROR is Displayed
Trouble Description: This message is displayed in the frequency parameters area to indicate that the output frequency is not
phase-locked. It is normally caused by an internal component failure.
Step 1.
6-12
Perform a self-test of the signal generator by pressing the
System Menu soft-key Selftest.
q
If self-test does not result in an error message(s), resume
normal operation
q
If an error message(s) is displayed, call a service technician
MG369XB OM
Operator Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Table 6-4.
Troubleshooting (3 of 3)
UNLEVELED is Displayed
Trouble Description: This message is displayed to indicate that the
RF output is unleveled.
Step 1.
Check that the output power does not exceed the specified
leveled-power rating and that the RF OUTPUT connector is
terminated into a 50W load.
q
Reduce the power level to not exceed the specified
leveled-power rating or terminate the RF OUTPUT connector with a 50W load
q
If error message remains displayed, call a service technician
RANGE is Displayed
Trouble Description: This message is displayed in the frequency parameters area to indicate that (1) the analog sweep start frequency entered is greater than the stop frequency, (2) the dF value entered results in a sweep outside the range of the instrument, (3) the step size
value entered is greater than the sweep range, (4) the number of steps
entered results in a step size of less than 0.1 Hz or 0.1 dB (0.001 mV),
or (5) the step sweep time entered divided by the number of steps entered results in a dwell time of <10 ms.
Step 1.
MG369XB OM
Check that (1) the analog sweep start frequency entered is
not greater than the stop frequency, (2) the dF value entered
does not try to set the frequency sweep outside the range of
the signal generator, (3) the step size entered is not greater
than F2 minus F1, (4) the number of steps entered does not
result in a step size that is smaller than the resolution of the
instrument, or (5) the step sweep time and number of steps
does not result in a dwell time of <10 ms.
q
Enter a valid sweep start frequency, dF value, step size,
step sweep time, or number of steps
q
If the error message remains displayed, call a service
technician
6-13
Routine Maintenance
6-4
Routine Maintenance
Operator Maintenance
Routine maintenance that you can perform consists of cleaning the fan
filters, cleaning the data display, and replacing a defective line fuse(s).
Cleaning the
Fan Filters
The signal generator must always receive adequate
ventilation. A blocked fan filter can cause the instrument to overheat and shut down. Check and
clean the rear panel fan filters periodically. Clean
the fan filters more frequently in dusty environments. Clean the filters as follows:
Step 1.
Disconnect the MG369XB from the power
source.
Step 2.
Carefully vacuum the fan filters from the
outside to clean them.
Cleaning the
Data Display
The data display of the signal generator is protected
by a plastic display filter. To clean the display filter,
use mild soap or detergent and water, or a commercial window cleaner. Do not use abrasive cleaners,
tissues, or paper towels which can scratch the plastic surface.
Replacing the
Line Fuses
The line fuses used in the MG369XB are 5A, type T
fuses. The line fuse value is printed on the rear
panel next to the power connector.
WARNING
Before changing the fuse, always remove the power cord
from the power outlet. There is the risk of receiving a fatal
electric shock if the fuse is replaced with the power cord
connected.
Always use a new fuse of the type and rating specified by
the fuse markings on the rear panel of the instrument.
6-14
MG369XB OM
Operator Maintenance
Routine Maintenance
To replace the line fuse, proceed as follows:
Step 1.
Turn off the rear panel power switch and
disconnect the MG369XB from the power
source.
Step 2.
Using a small flat-blade screwdriver,
carefully pry under the tab next to the
rear panel power switch to open the cover
and gain access to the fuse holders (refer
to Figure 6-1, below).
Step 3.
Slide out the fuse holders.
Step 4.
Replace the fuses in the fuse holders.
Step 5.
Install the fuse holders in the rear panel.
Step 6.
Close the cover to secure the fuse holders
in place. It will close with an audible
snap.
Step 7.
Reconnect the signal generator to the
power source and turn on the rear panel
power switch.
Figure 6-1. Replacing the Line Fuse
MG369XB OM
6-15/6-16
Chapter 7
Use With Other Instruments
Table of Contents
7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2
Master-Slave Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Instruments . . . . .
Initiating Master-Slave Operation . .
Master-Slave Operation. . . . . . . .
Master-Slave Operation in VNA Mode
Terminating Master-Slave Operation .
7-3
Use with a 56100A Scalar Network Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Connecting the MG369XB to the 56100A . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-4
Use with a 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer . . .
Connecting the MG369XB to the 8003 . . .
Setting Up the MG369XB . . . . . . . . .
Initiating 8003 SNA Operation . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-5
Use with a HP8757D Scalar Network Analyzer.
Connecting the MG369XB to a HP8757D .
Setting Up the MG369XB . . . . . . . . .
Initiating HP8757D SNA Operation . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-15
7-15
7-16
7-18
7-6
IF Up-Conversion (Option 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
MG369XB Mixer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-7
mmWave Source Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-7
7-7
7-9
Chapter 7
Use With Other Instruments
7-1
Introduction
This chapter provides information and instructions for using the Series MG369XB Synthesized signal generator with other instruments.
It contains the following:
q
Instructions for interconnecting and operating any two
MG369XB instruments in a master-slave configuration
q
Instructions for connecting the MG369XB to a Anritsu Model
56100A Scalar Network Analyzer so that it can be used as a signal source for the analyzer
q
Instructions for connecting the MG369XB to a Anritsu Model
360B Vector Network Analyzer so that it can be used as a signal
source for the analyzer operating in the tracking receiver mode
q
Instructions for connecting a MG369XB that has pulse modulation installed to a Giga-tronics Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer and setting up the signal generator so that it can be used as
a signal source for the analyzer
q
Instructions for connecting a MG369XB that has the pulse option
installed to a Hewlett Packard Model 8757D or 8757E Scalar
Network Analyzer and setting up the signal generator so that it
can be used as a signal source for the analyzer
q
Instructions for connecting and operating Option 7
q
Instructions for connecting and operating mmWave Source
Modules
NOTE
When the MG369XB is installed with a digital
down converter (Option 4), the analog sweep
capability is limited to ³500 MHz.
MG369XB OM
7-3
Master-Slave Operation
7-2
Master-Slave
Operation
Use With Other Instruments
Master-slave operation consists of connecting any two MG369XB instruments together and configuring them so that they produce CW
and synchronized, swept output signals at an operator-selectable frequency offset. One instrument (the Master) controls the other (the
Slave) via interface cables between their rear panel AUX I/O and SERIAL I/O connectors. The two units are phase-locked together by connecting them to the same 10 MHz reference time base.
T O
5 6 1 0 0 A
S N A
S E R IA L
I/O
A U X
I/O
1 0 M H z
R E F O U T
S E R IA L
I/O
A U X
I/O
1 0 M H z
R E F IN
R F O u tp u t
R F O u tp u t
M G 3 6 9 X B (M a s te r)
M G 3 6 9 X B (S la v e )
T O
Figure 7-1.
T O
D U T
MG369XB Configuration for Master-Slave Operation
NOTES
When connecting two instruments
together for Master-Slave operations, always use an Anritsu Master-Slave interface cable set, Part
No. ND36329.
If a Model 56100A Scalar Network
Analyzer is being used with the
master-slave configuration, (1) connect the AUX I/O cable end labeled
“SNA” to the rear panel AUX I/O
connector on the 56100A SNA and
(2) connect a dedicated system bus
cable (P/N 2100-1) between the
Master instrument rear panel
IEEE-488 GPIB connector and the
56100A SNA rear panel DEDICATED GPIB connector.
7-4
D U T
Connecting
the
Instruments
Connect the two instruments, shown in Figure 7-1,
as follows:
Step 1.
Connect the 3-port AUX I/O cable end labeled “MASTER” to the rear panel AUX
I/O connector on the Master instrument.
Connect the AUX I/O cable labeled
“SLAVE” to the rear panel AUX I/O connector on the Slave instrument.
Step 2.
Connect the ends of the flat interface cable to the rear panel Serial I/O connectors
on the Master and Slave instruments.
Step 3.
Connect one end of a coaxial cable to the
rear panel 10 MHz REF OUT connector on
the Master instrument. Connect the other
end to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN connector on the Slave instrument.
MG369XB OM
Use With Other Instruments
Master-Slave Operation
Step 4.
Initiating
Master-Slave
Operation
Connect the Master unit RF OUTPUT and
the Slave unit RF OUTPUT to the appropriate connections on the DUT.
The following paragraphs describe how to set up
both instruments to perform master-slave operations. Use the CW Frequency Mode menu map (Figure 4-2, page 4-6) to follow the menu sequences.
To initiate master-slave operation, turn on both instruments and place them in CW mode. The CW
menu (below) is displayed.
NOTE
Master-slave operations are always
initiated in the CW frequency
mode. Once initiated, you then can
change to a sweep frequency mode
of operation by selecting the desired frequency mode on the Master
instrument.
On the Master unit, press Master Slave > to access
the Master-Slave menu display (below).
This menu lets you perform the following:
q
Access the Slave Frequencies List menu
q
Set the delta frequency for the Slave unit
q
Set the Slave unit's main power level (L1)
q
Set the alternate sweep power level (L2) for
the Slave unit
q
Turn master-slave operation on and off
Press Slave Freqs... to access the Slave Frequencies
List menu (following page).
MG369XB OM
7-5
Master-Slave Operation
NOTE
Upon reset, the slave frequencies
(F0 - F9 and M0 - M9) return to the
default values.
Use With Other Instruments
This menu lets you edit the listed frequencies for
the Slave instrument [SLF0-SLF, SLM0-SLM9].
Use the cursor control keys to select a frequency parameter from the list, then press Edit Selected to
edit its value. Edit the current frequency parameter
value using the cursor control keys, rotary data
knob, or enter a new value using the key pad and
appropriate termination soft-key. Press Edit Selected again to close the open frequency parameter.
When you are finished editing the slave frequencies,
press < Previous to return to the Master-Slave
menu (below).
The Master-Slave menu lets you set the delta frequency and L1 and L2 power level parameters for
the Slave unit.
Press Slave Delta Freq [SLDF] to open the dF frequency parameter.
Press Slave L1 [SLL1] to open the main power level
parameter.
Press Slave L2 [SLL2] to open the alternate sweep
power level parameter.
7-6
MG369XB OM
Use With Other Instruments
Master-Slave Operation
Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination soft-key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
menu selection.
Press Enable [S1] to begin master-slave operation.
Press < Previous to return to the CW menu.
Master-Slave
Operation
q
Its output CW frequency or sweep frequency
range
q
Its output power level
q
The messages Remote and Local Lockout
The CW/sweep frequency settings on the Master
unit define the master sweep, and the corresponding
frequency settings on the Slave unit define the slave
sweep. For example, if slave frequency F1 is set to
4 GHz and slave frequency F2 is set to 12 GHz, then
the Slave unit will sweep from 4 to 12 GHz whenever the F1-F2 sweep range is selected on the Master unit. The Master unit will sweep from F1-F2
with the values of F1 and F2 defined in the Master
unit's frequency list.
NOTE
The 56100A SNA, when being used
with the master-slave configuration, will not display markers.
Master-Slave
Operation in
VNA Mode
MG369XB OM
During master-slave operation, the Slave unit is in
remote mode under the direct control of the Master
unit. The Slave unit displays the following:
In the VNA mode of master-slave operation, a Slave
unit is coupled to a Master instrument that is connected to a Vector Network Analyzer in a source or
dual source configuration. (Operating instructions
for the vector network analyzer can be found in the
VNA Operation Manual, P/N 10410-00110.) The following paragraphs describe how to set up the
MG369XB to perform master-slave operations in the
VNA mode.
7-7
Master-Slave Operation
Use With Other Instruments
Place both instruments in CW mode. Then, on the
Master unit, press Master Slave > to access the
Master Slave menu display.
At the Master Slave menu, press Slave Freqs... to
access the Slave Frequencies List menu display (below).
Press VNA > to access the VNA menu display (below).
This menu lets you set the frequency offset and output power level for the Slave instrument in the VNA
mode.
Press VNA Offset to open the slave frequency offset
parameter.
Press VNA Level to open the slave output power
level parameter.
Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
the current value using the cursor control keys, rotary data knob, or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
menu selection.
7-8
MG369XB OM
Use With Other Instruments
SLAVE
During master-slave operations in
VNA mode, this error message is
display ed on the Mas ter
instrument whenever the slave offset value entered results in a CW Terminating
frequency or frequency sweep out- Master-Slave
side the range of the Slave unit. En- Operation
tering a valid offset value clears the
error.
Master-Slave Operation
Press < Previous to return to the Slave Frequencies
List menu.
Return to the Master-Slave menu and press Enable
to begin master-slave operation.
The following describes how to terminate master-slave operation and return the Slave instrument
to local (front panel) control.
On the Master instrument, select CW mode.
At the CW menu, press Master Slave > to access
the Master-Slave menu display.
At the Master-Slave menu display, press Enable .
This terminates master-slave operation and returns
the Slave instrument to local (front panel) control.
MG369XB OM
7-9
Use with a 56100A Scalar Network Analyzer
7-3
Use with a 56100A
Scalar Network
Analyzer
Use With Other Instruments
The MG369XB is directly compatible with the Anritsu Model 56100A
Scalar Network Analyzer (SNA). The following paragraphs provide instructions for connecting the signal generator to the 56100A SNA so
that is can be used as a signal source for the analyzer. Operating instructions for the network analyzer can be found in the Model 56100A
Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual, P/N 10410-00193.
5 6 1 0 0 A S c a la r N e tw o r k A n a ly z e r
>
D e d ic a te d G P IB
>
A U X I/O
A
B
A U X I/O
S W R
A U T O T E S T E R
IE E E -4 8 8 G P IB
M G 3 6 9 X B S ig n a l G e n e r a to r
D U T
D e te c to r
Figure 7-2.
MG369XB to 56100A SNA Connections
Connecting
the MG369XB
to the 56100A
NOTES
The MG369XB’s GPIB address
should be set to 5 (the default address setting) for operation with a
56100A SNA. To verify or change
the GPIB address setting refer to
Configuring the GPIB on page 3-81.
Connect the MG369XB signal generator to the
56100A SNA as shown in Figure 7-2.
Step 1.
Connect one end of the Auxiliary I/O cable (P/N 806-7) to the 56100A rear panel
AUX I/O connector. Connect the other end
of the cable to the MG369XB rear panel
AUX I/O connector.
Step 2.
Connect one end of the dedicated system
bus cable (P/N 2100-1) to the 56100A rear
panel DEDICATED GPIB connector. Connect the other end of the cable to the
MG369XB rear panel IEEE-488 GPIB connector.
Step 3.
Turn on the instrument and the 56100A.
The system is now ready to operate.
The 56100A SNA will only accept
and display nine video markers, F1
thru F9, from the MG369XB.
When performing amplifier testing
only use the MG369XB power
level, L1.
7-10
MG369XB OM
Use With Other Instruments
7-4
Use with a 8003
Scalar Network
Analyzer
Use with a 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer
The MG369XB signal generator is compatible with the Giga-tronics
Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer (SNA). The following paragraphs provide instructions for connecting the MG369XB to the 8003
SNA and setting up the signal generator so that it can operate as a
signal source for the analyzer. Operating instructions for the scalar
network analyzer can be found in the Giga-tronics Model 8003 Scalar
Network Analyzer Operation Manual.
S E Q
S Y N C
B L A N K IN G
IN P U T
S W E E P IN
H O R IZ O U T
P U L S E T R IG G E R IN
A C M O D O U T
G P IB /
P R IV A T E
A U X
I/O
IE E E -4 8 8
G P IB
A
M G 3 6 9 X B
S ig n a l G e n e r a to r
T o D U T
B
C
8 0 0 3 S c a la r
N e tw o r k A n a ly z e r
T o D U T
S e n s o r
Figure 7-3.
MG369XB to 8003 SNA Connections
Connecting
the MG369XB
to the 8003
Connect the MG369XB signal generator to the 8003
scalar network analyzer as shown in Figure 7-3.
Step 1.
Connect one end of a GPIB cable to the
MG369XB rear panel IEEE-488 GPIB connector. Connect the other end of the cable
to the 8003 rear panel GPIB/ PRIVATE
connector.
Step 2.
Connect the special AUX I/O interface cable (Anritsu Part No. 806-90) to the
MG369XB rear panel AUX I/O connector.
Connect the cable end having BNC connectors as follows:
a. Connect the cable end labeled “SEQ
SYNC” to the 8003 rear panel
BLANKING INPUT connector.
MG369XB OM
7-11
Use with a 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer
Use With Other Instruments
b. Connect the cable end labeled “HORIZ
OUT” to the 8003 rear panel SWEEP
IN connector.
Step 3.
Setting Up the
MG369XB
Connect one end of a coaxial cable having
BNC connectors to the MG369XB rear
panel PULSE TRIGGER IN connector.
Connect the other end of the cable to the
8003 rear panel AC MOD OUT connector.
The MG369XB must be in the 8003 Scalar GPIB
mode of operation in order to operate as a signal
source for the SNA. The following paragraphs describe how to set up the MG369XB to enable the
8003 Scalar GPIB mode.
On the MG369XB front panel, press Line to place
the signal generator in operation.
Allow the signal generator to warm up, then press
the System main menu key. At the System menu
display, press Config . The System Configuration
menu (shown below) is displayed.
At the System Configuration menu, press GPIB > .
The Configure GPIB menu (shown below) is displayed.
7-12
MG369XB OM
Use With Other Instruments
Use with a 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer
At the Configure GPIB menu, press More > to access the First Additional Configure GPIB menu (below).
At this menu, press Emulation > to access the Second Additional Configure GPIB menu (below).
Press 8003 Scalar to enable the 8003 Scalar GPIB
mode. The display will reflect your selection.
The MG369XB signal generator is now ready to operate as a signal source for the 8003 SNA.
Initiating
8003 SNA
Operation
To initiate SNA operation, turn ON the Model 8003
and calibrate a 8003 sensor(s). (Refer to the Model
8003 Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual
for the calibration procedure.)
Use the following procedure to set the 8003 Source
Address to “5”. (The default address is “6”.)
MG369XB OM
Step 1.
On the 8003 front panel, press the
CONFIG key.
Step 2.
Select GPIB DEVICES from the menu displayed on the CRT screen.
7-13
Use with a 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer
Use With Other Instruments
Step 3.
Select SOURCE, then SOURCE ADDRESS.
Step 4.
Enter 5 on the keypad, then press the
dB/GHz termination key.
The 8003 will search for a source at address five
(The default GPIB address of the series MG369XB
signal generators is five). When the 8003 has properly identified the MG369XB, the message “Initializing W6700” will be displayed on the 8003 CRT
screen. (The MG369XB emulates the Anritsu 6700B
Swept Frequency Synthesizer GPIB command
codes.)
7-14
MG369XB OM
Use With Other Instruments
7-5
Use with a HP8757D
Scalar Network
Analyzer
Use with a HP8757D Scalar Network Analyzer
The MG369XB signal generator is compatible with the Hewlett
Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer (SNA). The following
paragraphs provide instructions for connecting the MG369XB to the
HP8757D SNA and setting up the signal generator so that it can operate as a signal source for the analyzer. Operating instructions for the
scalar network analyzer can be found in the Hewlett Packard 8757D
Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual.
S T O P S W E E P
S W P D W E L L IN
S E Q
S Y N C
P O S Z B L A N K
S W E E P IN
H O R IZ O U T
P U L S E T R IG G E R
A U X
I/O
IN
M O D U L A T O R
IE E E -4 8 8
G P IB
S y s te m
0 - 1 0 V
D R IV E
8 7 5 7
In te rfa c e
A
M G 3 6 9 X B
S ig n a l G e n e r a to r
T o D U T
B
C
R
H P 8 7 5 7 D S c a la r
N e tw o r k A n a ly z e r
T o D U T
S e n s o r
Figure 7-4.
MG369XB to HP8757D SNA Connections
Connecting
the MG369XB
to a HP8757D
MG369XB OM
Connect the MG369XB signal generator to the
HP8757D scalar network analyzer as shown in Figure 7-4.
Step 1.
Connect one end of a GPIB cable to the
MG369XB rear panel IEEE-488 GPIB connector. Connect the other end to the
HP8757D rear panel 8757 SYSTEM INTERFACE connector.
Step 2.
Connect one end of a coaxial cable having
BNC connectors to the MG369XB rear
panel PULSE TRIGGER IN connector.
Connect the other end of the cable to the
HP8757D rear panel MODULATOR DRIVE
connector. (Required for ac mode detection)
7-15
Use with a HP8757D Scalar Network Analyzer
Use With Other Instruments
Step 3.
Connect the special AUX I/O interface cable (Anritsu Part No. 806-97) to the
MG369XB rear panel AUX I/O connector.
Connect the cable end having BNC connectors as follows:
a. Connect the cable end labeled “SEQ
SYNC” to the HP8757D rear panel
POS Z BLANK connector.
b. Connect the cable end labeled “SWP
DWELL IN” to the HP8757D rear
panel STOP SWEEP connector.
c. Connect the cable end labeled “HORIZ
OUT” to the HP8757D rear panel
SWEEP IN 0 - 10V connector.
Setting Up the
MG369XB
The MG369XB must be set to GPIB address 19 and
in the 8757D Scalar mode of operation to operate as
a signal source for the SNA. The following paragraphs describe how to set up the MG369XB to enable the 8757D Scalar GPIB mode.
On the MG369XB front panel, press Line to place
the signal generator in operation.
Allow the signal generator to warm up, then press
the System main menu key. At the System menu
display, press Config . The System Configuration
menu (below) is displayed.
At the System Configuration menu, press GPIB .
7-16
MG369XB OM
Use With Other Instruments
Use with a HP8757D Scalar Network Analyzer
The Configure GPIB menu (below) is displayed.
Press GPIB Address to change the address of the
MG369XB on the bus. Enter 19 using the cursor
control keys or the data entry keypad and the terminator key
Hz
ns
ADRS
The new GPIB address (19) will appear on the display.
Press More > to access the First Additional Configure GPIB menu (below).
NOTE
For t he MG 369XB, D is play
Updates must be On when using
the HP8757D emulation mode.
MG369XB OM
At this menu, toggle the Display Updates between
On or Off depending upon your preference. Fastest
measurement results are obtained when Display
Updates are Off.
7-17
Use with a HP8757D Scalar Network Analyzer
Use With Other Instruments
At this menu, press Emulation > to access the GPIB
Emulation menu (below).
Press 8757D Scalar to enable the 8757D Scalar
GPIB mode. When enabled, the MG369XB will shift
to the analog sweep frequency mode sweeping at the
full range of the instrument.
Initiating
HP8757D SNA
Operation
Turn on the HP8757D to initiate the scalar network
analyzer operation. (Refer to the Hewlett Packard
Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer Operation
Manual for operating instructions.)
On the front panel of the HP8757D, press the
SYSTEM key to specify the detector mode for
measurements and select: MODE = AC or DC.
NOTE
AC detection mode offers superior
signal to noise ratios, but requires
the MG369XB configuration to
include the external pulse option.
When using AC detection mode, the following
keystrokes on the MG369XB initiates the pulse
modulator for use with the HP8757D:
Press the Modulation key on the front panel of the
MG369XB and select Pulse . Set the
Internal/External pulse mode to External and turn
on external pulse.
When using DC detection mode, the following
keystrokes on the MG369XB deactivates the pulse
modulator for use with the HP8757D:
Press the Modulation key on the front panel of the
MG369XB and select Pulse . Ensure that the pulse
mode is Off.
7-18
MG369XB OM
Use With Other Instruments
7-6
IF Up-Conversion
(Option 7)
IF Up-Conversion (Option 7)
Option 7 adds an internal mixer that can be used for the generic
up-conversion of an IF signal. The mixer’s RF, LO, and IF ports are
made available at the rear panel of the MG369XB via three female
K-Connectors. The typical application will feed the MG369XB microwave output, which can be moved to the rear panel via Option 9K, to
the mixer’s LO port. The user’s external IF signal will be fed to the
mixer’s IF port. The new up-converted signal will be available at the
mixer’s RF port. Figure 7-5 shows a block diagram of a QPSK up-conversion using the MG369XB with an MG3681A QPSK source.
QPSK Source
MG3681A
IF
RF
LO
RF Output
Up-converted QPSK
signal in transmission
channel.
2-40 GHz
MG369XB
Figure 7-5.
MG369XB OM
QPSK Up-conversion
7-19
IF Up-Conversion (Option 7)
Use With Other Instruments
AUX I/O
IF
RF
LO
RF Output
IEEE-488 GPIB
AUX I/O
10 Mhz
REF IN
10 Mhz
REF
OUT
IF
HORIZ
OUT
PULSE
TRIG
IN
RF
EXT
ALC
IN
LO
SERIAL
I/O
RF Output
IEEE-488 GPIB
Figure 7-6.
MG369XB Rear Panel IF Up-conversion Connectors.
MG369XB
Mixer Setup
Set up the MG369XB as follows:
Step 1.
Connect the MG369XB RF output to the
MG369XB rear panel LO input.
Step 2.
Connect an IF source output to the
MG369XB rear panel IF input.
Step 3.
Set the MG369XB power level to
+13 dBm.
Step 4.
Set the desired up-conversion frequency
on the MG369XB.
Step 5.
Connect the MG369XB rear panel mixer
RF output to your transmission channel.
The MG369XB is now configured to up-convert the
IF input to the microwave frequency set on the instruments front panel display.
7-20
MG369XB OM
Use With Other Instruments
7-7
mmWave Source
Modules
mmWave Source Modules
When the MG369XB is configured with Option 18, mmW Bias Output,
the synthesizer can power a mmWave source module to extend the RF
frequency output to 325 GHz.
Set up the mmWave source module and the MG369XB as shown in
Figure 7-7 below:
DC Supply
LO Input (+10 dBm)
Multiplied
RF Output
MG369XB
Figure 7-7.
mmWave
Source Module
MG369XB mmWave Source Module Setup.
When using mmWave source modules, the MG369XB should be set to
a +10 dBm RF power level output. It is also recommended to configure
a frequency scaling factor as indicated below:
Table 7-1.
MG369XB mmWave Source Module Setup.
mmWave Module
Input Frequency
Output Frequency
Frequency Scaling Factor
WR-15
12.5 GHz to 18.8 GHz
50 GHz to 75 GHz
4
WR-12
10 GHz to 15 GHz
60 GHz to 90 GHz
6
WR-10
12.5 GHz to 18.4 GHz
75 GHz to 110 GHz
6
WR-8
7.5 GHz to 11.7 GHz
90 GHz to 140 GHz
8
WR-6
9.1 GHz to 14.2 GHz
110 GHz to 170 GHz
12
WR-5
11.6 GHz to 18.4 GHz
140 GHz to 220 GHz
12
WR-3
12.2 GHz to 18.1 GHz
220 GHz to 325 GHz
18
MG369XB OM
7-21
mmWave Source Modules
Use With Other Instruments
To set the frequency scaling on the MG369XB, press:
System | Config RF > | More >
The Frequency Scaling factor can then be accessed by pressing the
Frequency Scaling soft key.
NOTE
Frequency scaling does not affect the actual frequency output of the MG369XB. It scales the
displayed frequency on the MG369XB to match
the output frequency of the mmWave source
module.
7-22
MG369XB OM
Appendix A
Rear Panel Connectors
A-1
Introduction
This appendix provides descriptions for the rear panel connectors on a
typical Series MG369XB Synthesized signal generator.
A-2
Rear Panel
Connectors
Figure A-1 provides an illustration of the rear panel and describes the
rear panel connectors.
A-3
Connector Pin-out
Diagrams
Figures A-2 and A-3 provide pin-out diagrams and descriptions for the
AUX I/O and IEEE-488 GPIB multi-pin connectors on the rear panel.
MG369XB OM
A-1
Rear Panel Index
1
2
Rear Panel Connectors
3
5
4
AUX I/O
7
6
10 MHz
REF
OUT
FM/FM
IN
HORIZ
OUT
PULSE
TRIG
IN
AM
IN
AM
OUT
PULSE
VIDEO
OUT
EXT
ALC
IN
FM/FM
OUT
PULSE
SYNC
OUT
10 MHz
REF
IN
8
9
15
16
10
11
SERIAL
I/O
EFC
IN
IEEE-488 GPIB
13
12
AUX I/O
10 MHz
REF
IN
IF
10 MHz
REF
OUT
HORIZ
OUT
PULSE
TRIG
IN
AM
OUT
PULSE
VIDEO
OUT
FM/FM
OUT
PULSE
SYNC
OUT
RF
LO
14
FM/FM
IN
AM
IN
EXT
ALC
IN
SERIAL
I/O
RF Output
IEEE-488 GPIB
Note: Connectors are Option Dependent
17
18
19
20
AUX I/O
IF
RF
LO
RF Output
IEEE-488 GPIB
AUX I/O
IF
10 MHz
REF
IN
LO
10 MHz
REF
OUT
HORIZ
OUT
PULSE
TRIG
IN
AM
OUT
PULSE
VIDEO
OUT
FM/FM
OUT
PULSE
SYNC
OUT
RF
FM/FM
IN
AM
IN
EXT
ALC
IN
SERIAL
I/O
RF Output
IEEE-488 GPIB
Figure A-1.
A-2
Rear Panel, Series MG369XB Synthesized Signal Generator (1 of 3)
MG369XB OM
Rear Panel Connectors
Rear Panel Index
1
AUX I/O: 25-pin connector that provides for single cable interface with another MG369XB (master-slave
operation) or with other Anritsu instruments such as the Anritsu 56100A Scalar Network Analyzer. A
pin-out diagram for this connector is shown in Figure A-2.
2
AM OUT: Provides a video modulating signal from the internal AM generator. BNC connector.
3
HORIZ OUT: Provides a 0V to 10V ramp during all sweep modes, regardless of sweep width. In the CW
mode, provides a voltage between 0V and 10V proportional to the full frequency range of the instrument.
When the CW Ramp is enabled, connector provides a repetitive 0V to 10V ramp. BNC connector, 50W
impedance.
4
10 MHz REF IN: Accepts an external 10 MHz ±100 Hz, 0 to 10 dBm time-base signal. Automatically disconnects the internal high-stability, time-base option, if installed. BNC connector, 50W impedance.
5
PULSE VIDEO OUT: Provides a video modulating signal from the internal pulse generator or external
pulse input. BNC connector.
6
PULSE TRIG IN: Accepts an external TTL level signal to pulse modulate the RF output. BNC connector.
7
10 MHz REF OUT: Provides a 0.5 Vp-p, AC coupled, 10 MHz signal derived from the internal frequency
standard of the signal generator. BNC connector, 50W impedance.
8
FM/FM IN: Accepts an external modulating signal (50W) to produce FM/FM on the RF output. FM/FM
sensitivity and FM/FM mode are selectable via the front panel menu or GPIB. BNC connector.
9
AM IN: Accepts an external modulating signal (50W) to produce AM on the RF output. AM sensitivity (Linear or Log) are selectable via the front panel menu or GPIB. BNC connector.
10
EXT ALC IN: Provides for leveling the RF output signal externally with either a remote detector or a
power meter. The rear panel BNC connector accepts a 0 to +1V or a 0 to –1V signal.
11
Input Line Voltage Module: Contains an input receptacle for connecting line voltage to the MG369XB,
two 5A, type T line fuses that provide over-voltage/current protection for the signal generator’s circuits
during operation and standby, and an On/Off power switch for applying line power to the MG369XB.
12
IEEE-488 GPIB: 24-pin connector that provides for remotely controlling the signal generator from an external controller via the IEEE488 bus (GPIB). A pin-out diagram for this connector is shown in Figure A-3.
13
FM/FM OUT: Provides a video modulating signal (50W) from the internal FM generator. BNC connector.
14
EFC: Electronic Frequency Control input accepts an external dc signal (–5V to +5V) to modulate the RF
output. Sensitivity: 10/n kHz/V where n is the reference multiplier (see page 3-80) and the modulation
bandwidth is £250 Hz. BNC connector.
15
PULSE SYNC OUT: Provides a TTL compatible signal synchronized to the internal pulse modulation output. BNC connector.
Figure A-1.
Rear Panel, Series MG369XB Synthesized Signal Generator (2 of 3)
MG369XB OM
A-3
Rear Panel Index
Rear Panel Connectors
16
SERIAL I/O: Provides access to two RS-232 terminal ports to support service and calibration functions and
master-slave operations. RJ45 connector.
17
RF Output Connector (Option 9): Provides RF output at the rear panel of the instrument.
18
Mixer IF Input (Option 7): Accepts an external IF input from DC to 500 MHz or
Scan Modulator Input (Option 20): Accepts 0 to 6 Vdc modulating input.
19
Mixer RF Output (Option 7): Provides an up-converted IF signal from 1 to 40 GHz.
20
Mixer LO Input (Option 7): Accepts an external RF input from 1 to 40 GHz or
mmW Bias Output (Option 18): Provides a 12 Vdc supply for an external millimeter wave module.
Figure A-1.
A-4
Rear Panel, Series MG369XB Synthesized Signal Generator (3 of 3)
MG369XB OM
Rear Panel Connectors
AUX I/O Connector
AUX I/O
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PIN
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1
HORIZ OUTPUT
2
GND
Horizontal Sweep Output: Provides a 0V at beginning and +10V at end of sweep
for all sweep modes, regardless of sweep width. In the CW mode, the voltage is
proportional to frequency between 0V at low end and +10V at the high end of
range. In CW mode, if CW Ramp is enabled, a repetitive, 0V to +10V ramp is provided. The ramp speed is adjusted by the Sweep Time function.
Chassis Ground
3
SEQ SYNC
4
L ALT ENABLE
5
MARKER OUTPUT
6
RETRACE BLANKING
7
L ALT SWP
8
SHIELD
9
TRIGGER OUTPUT
10
SWP DWELL OUT
Figure A-2.
Sequential Sync Output: Provides a +5V signal during sweep retrace, at band
switching points, and during each frequency step in step sweep mode, –5V during markers, and –10V during the selected marker.
L-Alternate Enable Output: Provides a TTL low-level signal which indicates that
the alternate sweep mode is active.
Marker Output: Provides a +5V or –5V signal during a marker. Signal polarity selected from a front panel menu.
Retrace Blanking Output: Provides a +5V or –5V signal coincident with sweep retrace. Signal polarity selected from a front panel menu.
L-Alternate Sweep Output: Provides a TTL low-level signal to indicate that the
primary sweep is in progress or a TTL high-level signal to indicate that the alternate sweep is in progress.
Cable Shield/Chassis Ground
Trigger Output: Provides a TTL low-level trigger signal for external devices or instruments.
Sweep Dwell Output: Provides an open-collector output which goes to ground
when the sweep is dwelled at the start, stop, and band switching frequencies, and
at the markers.
Pin-out Diagram, AUX I/O Connector (1 of 2)
MG369XB OM
A-5
AUX I/O Connector
PIN
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
11
LOCK STATUS
12
PENLIFT
Lock Status Output: Provides a TTL high-level signal when the frequency is
phase-locked.
Penlift: Toggles to ground for plotter penlift control.
13
EXT TRIGGER
14
V/GHz
15
EOS INPUT
16
EOS OUTPUT
17
AUX 1
18
SWP DWELL IN
19
AUX 2
20
BAND SWITCH BLANK
21
SPARE
22
HORIZ IN
23
RETURN
24
GND
25
MEMORY SEQ
Figure A-2.
A-6
Rear Panel Connectors
External Trigger: Accepts a TTL low-level signal of 1 ms width to trigger a sweep.
V/GHz Output: Provides a reference voltage relative to the RF output frequency
(1.0 V/GHz for Model MG3692B; 0.5 V/GHz for Model MG3694B).
End-of-Sweep Input: Accepts a TTL high-level signal to tell the signal generator
to begin the end of sweep dwell.
End-of-Sweep Output: Provides a TTL high-level signal when the signal generator has begun the end of sweep dwell.
Aux 1: Auxiliary input/output to the processor (PB6).
Sweep Dwell Input: Permits a TTL low-level signal to pause the sweep. The
sweep resumes when the signal is removed.
Aux 2: Auxiliary input/output to the processor (PC3).
Band Switch Blanking Output: Provides a +5V or –5V signal coincident with band
switching points. Signal polarity is selected from a front panel menu.
Horizontal Sweep Input: Accepts a 0V to 10V external sweep ramp from a Master
MG369XB. This input is automatically selected when the signal generator is in the
Slave Mode.
Horizontal Sweep Input return.
Chassis Ground
Memory Sequencing Input: Accepts a TTL low-level signal to sequence through
ten stored, front panel setups.
Pin-out Diagram, AUX I/O Connector (2 of 2)
MG369XB OM
Rear Panel Connectors
IEEE-488 GPIB Connector
IEEE-488 GPIB
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
PIN
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1-4
DIO 1 thru DIO 4
5
EOI
6
DAV
7
NRFD
8
NDAC
9
IFC
10
SRQ
11
ATN
Data Input/Output: Bits are HIGH when the data is logical 0 and LOW when the
data is logical 1.
End or Identify: A low-true state indicates that the last byte of a multi-byte message has been placed on the line.
Data Valid: A low-rue state indicates that the active talker has (1) sensed that
NRFD is high-false and NDAC is low-true, (2) placed the data byte on the bus,
and (3) waited an appropriate length of time for the data to settle.
Not Ready For Data: A high-false state indicates that all active listeners are ready
to accept new data.
Not Data Accepted: A low-true state indicates that all addressed listeners have
accepted the current data byte for internal processing.
Interface Clear: A low-true state places all bus instruments in a known, quiescent
state—unaddressed to talk, unaddressed to listen, and service request idle.
Service Request: A low-true state indicates that a bus instrument desires the immediate attention of the controller.
Attention: A low-true state indicates that the bus is in the command mode (data
lines are carrying bus commands). A high-false state indicates that the bus is in
the data mode (data lines are carrying device-dependent instructions or data).
Chassis Ground
12
Shield
13-16
DIO5 thru DIO6
17
REN
18-24
GND
Figure A-3.
Data Input/Output: Bits are HIGH when the data is logical 0 and LOW when the
data is logical 1.
Remote Enable: A low-true state enables bus instruments to be operated remotely, when addressed.
Logic Ground
Pin-out Diagram, IEEE-488 GPIB Connector
MG369XB OM
A-7/A-8
Appendix B
Performance Specifications
This appendix includes the technical data sheet for the series
MG3690B RF/Microwave Signal Generator, part number:
11410-00344.
The latest copy of this data sheet may be downloaded from the Anritsu
Internet site at: http://www.us.anritsu.com
Subject Index
A-E
Subject Index
A
D
Address, Setting GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
ALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Alternate Sweep Frequency Mode
Activating the Alternate Sweep . . . . . . 3-39
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Selecting a Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
AM Mode
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Providing AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Analog Sweep Frequency Mode
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Selecting Analog Sweep Mode . . . . . . . 3-26
Setting the Sweep Time. . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Anritsu
Service Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Data Display
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 to 3-11
Menu Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Menu Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 to 3-19
Data Entry Area
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 to 3-13
Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Delete at Index
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Display Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
Display, Zero (phase offset) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Dwell Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29, 3-48
C
Calibration, Reference Oscillator . . . 3-88 to 3-91
Connectors
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Connectors, Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Copy to List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Copying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Cursor Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
CW Frequency Mode
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Selecting a CW Frequency . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Selecting CW Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
CW Power Sweep Mode
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Selecting a Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Selecting a Sweep Trigger . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Selecting CW Power Sweep Mode . . . . . 3-56
Selecting Linear or Logarithmic Sweep . . 3-60
Setting Dwell Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Setting Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
CW Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
MG369XB OM
E
Editing
Current Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17, 3-21
Frequency List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
List Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
List Index Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Marker List Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Phase Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23, 3-36
Start and Stop Frequencies. . . . . . . . . 3-34
Start and Stop Power Levels . . . . . . . . 3-59
Electronic Frequency Control (EFC) . . . . . . 3-25
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 to 3-19
Editing the Current Value . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Entering a New Value. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Opening the Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Setting Increment Sizes . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Erasing Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Error Messages
Operation Related. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 to 6-7
External Modulation
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Index-1
F-L
Subject Index
F
Fixed Power Level Mode
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Selecting Fixed Power Level Mode . . . . . 3-51
Selecting Linear or Logarithmic Units . . . 3-52
Flatness Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
FM Mode
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Providing FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Frequency Control
Frequency List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Selecting a Preset Frequency . . . . . . . . 3-21
Selecting a Preset Sweep Range . . . . . . 3-34
Setting a Preset Sweep Range . . . . . . . 3-35
Frequency Markers
Intensity Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Marker List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Video Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Frequency Modes
Analog Sweep Frequency Mode . . . . . . 3-26
CW Frequency Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
List Sweep Frequency Mode . . . . . . . . 3-42
Step Sweep Frequency Mode . . . . . . . . 3-28
Frequency Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Frequency Synthesis Test
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Test Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Front Panel
Data Display Area . . . . . . . . 3-6, 3-8 to 3-11
Data Entry Area . . . . . . . . 3-7, 3-12 to 3-13
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 to 3-7
Fuse, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
G
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB)
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Line Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Native Interface Language . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Setup and Interconnection . . . . . 2-10 to 2-12
I
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Index-2
IF Up-Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Index
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Insert at Index
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Intensity Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Internal Modulation
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
K
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Knob, Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
L
Language, GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leveling Operations
ALC Power Slope . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuator Decoupling . . . . . . . .
Auto Fixed Gain . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Leveling . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Leveling . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Leveling Mode . . . . . .
User Cal (User Power Level Flatness
Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Sweep Frequency Mode
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Frequency Editing . . . . . . . .
List Power Editing . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Sweep Range . . . . . . .
Selecting a Sweep Trigger . . . . . .
Selecting List Sweep Mode . . . . . .
. . . 2-12
. . . 3-52
. . . 3-54
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-68
3-67
3-66
3-65
3-66
3-64
4-14
3-63
. . . 3-70
. . . 3-44
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-42
3-45
3-46
4-10
3-48
3-49
3-43
MG369XB OM
Subject Index
List Sweep Trigger
Auto . . . . . .
External . . . .
Manual . . . .
Single . . . . .
Lock Error. . . . .
Log/Linear. . . . .
M-P
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 3-49
3-49, 3-57
. . . 3-49
3-49, 3-57
. . . 6-12
. . . 3-31
M
Main Menu Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Maintenance, Routine
Display Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Fan Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Manual
Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
GPIB Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Manual Sweep Frequency Mode
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Selecting a Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Selecting Manual Sweep Mode . . . . . . . 3-33
Manual Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Marker
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Editing List Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Tagging List Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Master Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75, 3-86
Master-Slave Operation. . . . . . . . . . 7-4 to 7-9
Menu Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Menu Maps
Analog Sweep Frequency Mode . . . . . . . 4-7
CW Frequency Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
CW Power Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Fixed Power Level Mode . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Leveling Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
List Sweep Frequency Mode . . . . . . . . 4-10
Manual Sweep Frequency Mode . . . . . . . 4-9
Sample Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Step Sweep Frequency Mode. . . . . . . . . 4-8
Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode . . . . 4-13
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Menu Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
MG369XB OM
Messages
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 to 6-8
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Mixer, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Mode
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Modulation Modes. . . . . . . . . . . 3-92 to 3-115
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
Scan Modulation (Option 20) . . . . . . . 3-119
N
Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
O
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Operational Verification Tests. . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Operator Maintenance
Error and Warning/Status Messages 6-3 to 6-10
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . 6-14 to 6-15
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 to 6-13
Options, List of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 to 1-6
P
Parameter
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 1-1
Phase Modulation Mode
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
Internal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
Providing Phase Modulation . . . . . . . 3-102
Phase Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests
Accuracy Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Flatness Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Test Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 to 5-39
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Index-3
R-S
Subject Index
Power Level Control
Alternate Sweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Level List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Selecting a Preset Power Level . . . . . . . 3-52
Selecting a Preset Sweep Range . . . . . . 3-60
Setting a Preset Sweep Range . . . . . . . 3-60
Power Level Modes
CW Power Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Fixed Power Level Mode . . . . . . 3-51 to 3-55
Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode . . . . 3-56
Power Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Power List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Power Measurement, Internal (Option 8) . 3-116 to
3-118
Power Meter
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Power Sweep Trigger
Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Pre-Calc List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Preparation for Storage/Shipment . . . . . . . 2-13
Preparation for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 to 2-4
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Standby Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Warmup Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Preset Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Preset Sweep Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Pulse Modulation Mode
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Internal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
Providing Pulse Modulation . . . . . . . . 3-107
Stepped Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
R
Rack Mounting Kit (Option 1)
Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . 2-5 to 2-9
Range, Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Rear Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Recalling Instrument Setups. . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Reference Oscillator Calibration. . . . 3-88 to 3-91
Reset, Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Reset, to Default Parameters. . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Index-4
S
Safety
Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Saving Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
Scan Modulation (Option 20) . . . . . . . . . 3-119
Scope of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Secure Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Self Test
From System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Self-Test
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 to 6-7
Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Specifications, Performance . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Standby Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 3-14
Start Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Start Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 to 3-16
Start-Up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Step Sweep Frequency Mode
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Selecting a Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Selecting a Sweep Trigger . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Selecting Alternate Sweep . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Selecting Log/Linear Sweep . . . . . . . . 3-31
Selecting Step Sweep Mode. . . . . . . . . 3-28
Setting Dwell Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Setting Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Setting Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Using Frequency Markers . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Stop Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Sweep Frequency Modes
List Sweep Frequency Mode . . . . . . . . 3-42
Manual Sweep Frequency Mode . . . . . . 3-32
Step Sweep Frequency Mode . . . . . . . . 3-28
Sweep Frequency Operation . . . . . . 3-26 to 3-50
Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Selecting a Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Selecting a Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Selecting Linear or Logarithmic Sweep . . 3-60
Setting Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27, 3-30
MG369XB OM
Subject Index
T-Z
Sweep Trigger
Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External . . . . . . . . . . .
Single . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration
Configuring the Front Panel
Configuring the GPIB. . . .
Configuring the Rear Panel.
Configuring the RF . . . . .
Frequency Scaling. . . . . .
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Increment Sizes . .
. . . . . . . . 3-31
. . . . . . . . 3-31
. . . . . . . . 3-31
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-77
3-81
3-78
3-79
3-80
4-19
3-84
T
Termination Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Termination, GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 5-3
Test Record
Frequency Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Testing, Operational Verification
Frequency Synthesis . . . . . . . . . 5-5 to 5-9
Initial MG369XB Checkout . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness 5-10 to 5-39
Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Test Records . . . . . . . . 5-4, 5-7, 5-16 to 5-39
Testing, Performance Verification
Maximum Leveled Power Listing . . . 1-5 to 1-6
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
MG369XB OM
Trigger
List Sweep . . . . . .
Power Sweep . . . .
Sweep . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Tables.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . 3-49
. . . . 3-57
. . . . 3-31
6-11 to 6-13
U
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52, 3-60
Unleveled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Updates, Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
Use With Other Instruments
56100A Scalar Network Analyzer . . . . . 7-10
8003 Scalar Network Analyzer . . 7-11 to 7-14
HP8757D Scalar Network Analyzer 7-15 to 7-18
IF Up-Conversion . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 to 7-20
Master-Slave Operation . . . . . . . . 7-4 to 7-9
Option 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
V
Video Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
W
Warmup Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Z
Zero Display (phase offset) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Index-5/Index-6